Ug-Dc5065ii 6075ii

Microsoft and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and other
countries.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.
For information on license, refer to About License.
The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji
Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.
Important
(1) This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied or
modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
(2) Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
(3) We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
(4) Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized
operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized
operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered trademarks of Xerox
Corporation. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation
and Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
DocuWorks is a trademark.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1
1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9

Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10
Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 11
Guides Supplied.................................................................................................... 11
Organization of this Guide .................................................................................... 11
Conventions .......................................................................................................... 13
Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 14
Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 14
Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 16
Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 19
Consumable.......................................................................................................... 21
Regulation ................................................................................................................. 22
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B) ................................................................. 22
Regulatory Information for RFID ........................................................................... 22
Product Safety Certification (CB) .......................................................................... 22
Environment .............................................................................................................. 23
About License............................................................................................................ 24
RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 24
Heimdal................................................................................................................. 24
LAMA .................................................................................................................... 24
JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 25
Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 25
FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 25
OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 26
Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 29
2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 31

Machine Components................................................................................................ 32
Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 39
Powering On ......................................................................................................... 39
Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 39
Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 40
Power Saver mode .................................................................................................... 41
Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval............................................... 41
Exiting the Power Saver Mode.............................................................................. 44
Control panel ............................................................................................................. 45
Customizing the Control Panel ............................................................................. 47
Web Applications .................................................................................................. 48
3 Setting up the Network Controller ......................................................................... 49
1
Preparations ...............................................................................................................50
Installation Procedure.................................................................................................50
Configuration on the Machine................................................................................50
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .......................................................50
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode.........................50
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ........51
Step 4 Setting an IP address .................................................................................51
Configuration on the Computer ..................................................................................54
4 Copy ..........................................................................................................................55
Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................56
Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................56
Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................58
Step 3 Entering the Quantity..................................................................................59
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................59
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status ................................................60
Operations during Copying.........................................................................................61
Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................61
Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................62
Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................62
General Settings.........................................................................................................63
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................63
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................66
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...........................................................69
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................73
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing).................................................73
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ........................................73
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................73
Image Quality .............................................................................................................74
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................74
Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation) ......................................76
Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast) ...................................76
Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality).................................................................77
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................78
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) .........................................................................78
Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document) ..................................................79
Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................80
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................80
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).............................82
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................83
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......84
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)....................85
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................85
Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) .....................................................87
Image Rotation
2
Table of Contents
(Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally) ...................... 89

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images).............................................. 90
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ................... 91
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)............................................................ 91
Output Format ........................................................................................................... 93
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .................................................................. 94
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) .................................................................. 97
Transparency Separators
(Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ............................................... 99
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ..................................... 100
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)......................... 101
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)...................................... 102
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)................................. 103
Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background) ....................................... 110
Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) .......................................................... 113
Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down).............................................. 114
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper).................................................................. 115
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) .................... 115
2 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies).......................................................... 116
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing) .............................................. 116
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................ 118
Job Assembly .......................................................................................................... 119
Build Job
(Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation) .... 119
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ................................... 122
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 123
Delete Outside/Delete Inside
(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)....................... 124
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .......................... 126
5 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 127

Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 128
Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 128
Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 130
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 132
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ............................................. 133
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 133
Stopping the Scan Job ............................................................................................ 134
General Settings...................................................................................................... 135
Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan) .................................................... 135
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ................................... 136
Original Type (Select the Document Type)......................................................... 137
Image Quality .......................................................................................................... 138
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ..................................................... 138
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)....................................... 138
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting
3
contrast)...............................................................................................................139
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)........................140
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................140
Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................141
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)..........................................141
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ....................................141
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .......................142
Original Size (Specifying an Original Size) ..........................................................143
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......144
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................145
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................146
Output Format ..........................................................................................................147
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) .........................147
6 Stored Programming..............................................................................................149
Stored Programming Overview ................................................................................150
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ...................................................151
Registering Stored Programs ..............................................................................152
Registering Stored Program (Build Job) ..............................................................153
Deleting Stored Programs ...................................................................................154
Entering/Changing Stored Program Name ..........................................................154
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs..................................................155
Calling Stored Programs ..........................................................................................156
7 Paper and Other Media ..........................................................................................157

Paper Types .............................................................................................................158
Supported Paper Weight and Quantity ................................................................158
Loading Paper ..........................................................................................................162
Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2........................................................................163
Loading Paper in the Tray 3 ................................................................................164
Loading Paper in the Tray 4 ................................................................................165
Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) .................................................................166
Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) ..........................................................167
Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (High Capacity).......................................................168
Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ...............................................169
Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................170
Loading Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).............................................................171
Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)......................................................171
Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Tray 6
(A3+ High Capacity).............................................................................................172
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays ....................................................................173
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2......................................................173
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3.............................................................174
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 4 ..............................................................175
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity).....................................176
4
Table of Contents
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ............................ 178
Changing Paper Settings......................................................................................... 179
8 System Settings..................................................................................................... 183

System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................... 184
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .................................................... 184
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode ...................... 184
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu...... 185
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen ............................. 185
Step 5 Setting the Feature .................................................................................. 186
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ....................................................... 186
System Settings Menu List ...................................................................................... 187
Entering Text ........................................................................................................... 193
Common Settings .................................................................................................... 194
Machine Clock/Timers ........................................................................................ 195
Audio Tones........................................................................................................ 198
Screen/Button Settings ....................................................................................... 200
Paper Tray Settings ............................................................................................ 203
Image Quality Adjustment................................................................................... 211
Reports ............................................................................................................... 214
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 215
Watermark .......................................................................................................... 216
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 217
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................................ 224
General Settings Tab - Features Allocation ........................................................ 225
Preset Buttons .................................................................................................... 225
Copy Defaults ..................................................................................................... 226
Copy Control ....................................................................................................... 231
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 237
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 238
Custom Colors .................................................................................................... 238
Annotation - Create Stamps................................................................................ 239
Scan Mode Settings ................................................................................................ 240
General Settings Tab .......................................................................................... 241
Scan Defaults...................................................................................................... 242
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 243
Output Size Defaults ........................................................................................... 244
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 244
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 245
Network Controller Settings..................................................................................... 247
Network Settings................................................................................................. 247
System Administrator Settings ................................................................................ 249
System Administrator Login ID ........................................................................... 249
System Administrator’s Passcode ...................................................................... 250
5
Maximum Login Attempts ....................................................................................251
Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................................252
Create/Check User Accounts ..............................................................................253
Reset User Accounts ...........................................................................................256
System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs) .........................................................257
User Details Setup...............................................................................................257
Passcode Entry from Control Panel.....................................................................258
Login Setup/Auditron Mode .................................................................................258
9 Job Status ...............................................................................................................261

Job Status Overview ................................................................................................262
Checking Current/Pending Jobs...............................................................................263
Checking Completed Jobs .......................................................................................264
Handling Error Terminations ....................................................................................265
10 Machine Status .......................................................................................................267

Overview of Machine Status.....................................................................................268
Machine Status.........................................................................................................269
Machine Information ............................................................................................269
Paper Tray ...........................................................................................................271
Overwrite Hard Disk.............................................................................................271
Billing Meter/Print Report .........................................................................................272
Billing Meter .........................................................................................................272
User Account Billing Meter ..................................................................................273
Print Report/List ...................................................................................................275
Supplies....................................................................................................................278
Faults........................................................................................................................279
11 Authentication and Auditron Administration ......................................................281

Overview of Authentication.......................................................................................282
Users Controlled by Authentication .....................................................................282
Types of Authentication .......................................................................................282
Features Controlled by Authentication.................................................................283
Overview of Auditron Administration ........................................................................284
Authentication and Auditron Administration.........................................................284
Manageable Features and Services ....................................................................284
12 Maintenance............................................................................................................285
Replacing Supplies...................................................................................................286
Replacing Toner Cartridges.................................................................................287
Replacing the Waste Toner Container.................................................................289
Replacing Drum Cartridge R1
(for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................291
Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4
(for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................294
6
Table of Contents
Replacing the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or

C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................................................ 298
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker
or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker...................................................................... 299
Replacing the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker................... 301
Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-Finisher or
Emptying the Punch Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker......... 304
Replacing the Staple Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker........ 305
Cleaning the Machine.............................................................................................. 307
Cleaning the Exterior .......................................................................................... 307
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ......................................... 307
Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass .................................... 308
Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers.................................................................... 309
Executing Calibration............................................................................................... 310
Printing a Report/List ............................................................................................... 315
13 Problem Solving .................................................................................................... 317

Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 318
Machine Trouble...................................................................................................... 320
Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................... 324
Trouble during Copying ........................................................................................... 329
Unable to Copy ................................................................................................... 329
The Copy Result is not What was Expected....................................................... 330
Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 334
Other Errors ........................................................................................................ 343
Paper Jams ............................................................................................................. 344
Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ........................................................................... 345
Paper Jams in the Tray 3.................................................................................... 345
Paper Jams in the Tray 4.................................................................................... 346
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)..................................................................... 346
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass) when A3+ High Capacity Tray is installed .. 347
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) .......................................................... 348
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)................................................... 350
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module.................................................................... 353
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover ................................................................. 354
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover............................................................... 355
Paper Jams in the Output Tray ........................................................................... 357
Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker .................. 357
Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................. 370
Document Jams ...................................................................................................... 381
Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................... 384
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or
Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge
7
for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ................386
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............388
Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ...............390
Solving Curled Output ..............................................................................................392
14 Appendix .................................................................................................................393
Specifications ...........................................................................................................394
Printable Area...........................................................................................................402
List of Options ..........................................................................................................403
Notes and Restrictions .............................................................................................404
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine..............................................404
Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job..........................................................404
Index ...............................................................................................................................405
8
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter contains descriptions about how to use this document, as well as
cautions on using the product safely and legally.
z Preface .......................................................................................................10
z Using This Guide ........................................................................................11
z Safety Notes ............................................................................................... 14
z Regulation...................................................................................................22
z
Environment................................................................................................ 23
z About License .............................................................................................24
z
Legal Notice................................................................................................ 29
Preface
Thank you for selecting the Fuji Xerox DocuColor 6075II/5065II.

Before Using the Machine
This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan operating procedures,

maintenance information like how to clear paper jams, daily care, setting various items,
and precautions.
This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating
environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to
operate a personal computer.
Please read this guide thoroughly to obtain the best performance on this product. After
reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case
you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
1
For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Network
Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer
functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.
Since the machine is equipped with anti-counterfeit features, in some rare cases,
certain kinds of documents may be unable to copy.
May 2007
Fuji Xerox
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .

Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.
The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS

3260)]. The equipment is manufactured under an ISO 9001 Quality System. The
equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various
national bodies.
The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of
Commerce in conformance with CISPR publ. 22 (AS/NZISS CISPR22:2002) which
relates to radio frequency interference regulations, and also complies with the
Australian Communication Authority requirements.
NOTE: Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified
separately in compliance with their requirements.
Any unauthorized alteration, which includes the addition of new functions or the
connection of external devices, may impact this certification.
Contact your local Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.
10
Using This Guide
Using This Guide
This section describes the organization of this guide.

Guides Supplied
We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.
Included Manuals
Several manuals are included with this product. They are referred to as accompanying
manuals.
These accompanying manuals include descriptions on configurations and operation of
the product.
The below manuals are included with the machine.
1
User Guide (This Document)
This guide describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan, clearing paper jams,
daily care, setting the various items and safety information.
USER DOCUMENTATIONS for Network Controller

A guide to installing print driver, configuring the Network Controller. This manual is
included in the Network Controller.
Guides for Optional Accessories

Optional accessories are also available for the machine. User Guides are provided with
the optional accessories exclusively for the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. These User
Guides are referred to as "guides for optional accessories". Guides for optional
accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.
Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional
accessories and installing software.
Organization of this Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.

Describes how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely
and legally.
2 Product Overview
Describes basic information such as identifying the major components, how to switch
the machine on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver
feature.
3 Setting up the Network Controller

Describes how to configure the Network Controller.
4 Copy
Describes the basic operations and features of copying.
11
5 Scan
Describes the basic operations and features of scanning.
6 Stored Programming
Describes the stored programming features that enables to record a series of

operations.
7 Paper and Other Media

Describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when
handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
8 System Settings
Describes how to use the system settings.
1 9 Job Status
Describes the job status feature.
10 Machine Status

Describes the machine status feature.
11 Authentication and Auditron Administration

The machine has an authorization feature to restrict use of features of the machine, as
well as administration features to monitor usage statuses.
12 Maintenance
Describes procedures for replacing supplies, cleaning the machine, calibration, and
printing reports/lists.
13 Problem Solving

Describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
14 Appendix
Describes the specifications, printable area, ESC/P emulation, PDF direct print,
optional accessories list, and cautions/restrictions.
12
Using This Guide
Conventions
z In this document, “computer” refers to a personal computer or workstation.
The following icons are used in this guide.

z
Important Indicates important information that you should read.

Note Indicates additional information on operations or features.
z The following conventions are used in this guide:
" " : The cross-reference is within this guide.
" " : Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen
messages and input text.
[ ] : Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names
displayed in the touch screen, as well as the names of menus,
commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the
computer screen and their buttons and menu names.
1
< > button: Indicates a hardware button on the computer.
< > key: Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.
z Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading with one of the long edges of the document
or paper.
, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading with one of the short edges of the document
or paper.
LEF Orientation SEF Orientation
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
13
Safety Notes
Before using this product, read "Safety Notes"carefully for safety use.
This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with
strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with
environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use..
WARNING
Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to
external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for more information.
Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for the
1 followings:
Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or
fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high.
Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal
injuries.
Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or
damages to machine.
A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine.

Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.
Caution Flammable Explodable Electric Heated Moving Pinched

shock surface object fingers
A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid

any dangerous acts.
Prohibited No fire Do not Do not use Do not Keep away Never touch
touch in bathroom tear down from wet with wet hand
A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions

carefully to carry out these essential tasks.
Instructions Unplug Ground/

Earth
Electrical Safety
This product shall be operated by the electrical supply as indicated on the product's
data plate label. Consult your local power company to check if your electrical supply
meets the requirements.
14
Safety Notes
WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.

This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug
fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug
doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk

of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to
the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.
Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.
Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent
overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug
adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative
to check if an outlet is grounded.
Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity
than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the
rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage.
Never touch the power cord with wet hands. It may cause electric shock. 1
Do not place an object on the power cord.
Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp
environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may
generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord
supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox.
The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other
product.
Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate
heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local
Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or
uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.
When cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch
circuit). Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.
Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and
unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and
eventually cause a fire accident.
Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the
cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident.
Switch off and unplug the product when it is not used over weekends or long
holidays. It may cause deterioration of insulations and eventually electric
shock or a fire accident.
15
Once a month, switch off this product and check if

z the power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet;
z the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;
z
he plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; and
z the power cord is not cracked or worn down.
Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first
and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Machine Installation
Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power
1 cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause
electric shock or a fire accident.
Never locate this product in the following places:

z Near radiators or any other heat sources
z
Near volatile flammable materials such as curtains
z
In the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment
z
In the place receiving direct sunlight
z Near cookers or humidifiers
Locate this product on the level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight
of 550 Kg. Otherwise, if tilted, the product may fall over and cause injuries.
Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation

openings of the product. Poor ventilation may cause overheat and a fire
accident.
Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the
power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.
Main unit
20
915
1855
469
597
20 1574 80
323 (Unit:mm)
1674
16
Safety Notes
When C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed
20

915
1855
469
597
20 2096 80
2196
323
(Unit:mm)
1
When folding unit D2 (optional) is installed to D2-Finisher with Booklet
20
915
1855
597
20 2425 80
323
(Unit:mm)
2525
When D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed
20
915
1855
597
20 2225 80
323 (Unit:mm)
2325
17
When A3+ High Capacity Tray (optional) is installed

20
915
1855
597
1
20 2045 80
323
(Unit:mm)
2145
Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall
over and cause injuries.
Front Left
Back Right
Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall
over or slide and cause injuries.
To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the
following environment:
z
Temperature: 10 - 32 °C
z Humidity: 15 - 85 %
When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by
heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial
deletion on printing.
18
Safety Notes
Operational Safety

The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer
documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other
maintenance procedures not described in the documentation.
This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard
areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors
which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never
remove those covers and protectors.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the
product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot.
z The product emits unusual noise or odor.
z
The power cord is cracked or worn down.
1
z A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated.
z
Any liquid is spilled into the product.
z
The product is soaked in water.
z
Any part of the product is damaged.
Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.
Do not place any of the followings on the product:
z Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cups
z
Metal parts such as staples or clips
z Heavy objects
If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause
electric shock or a fire accident.
Do not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When
paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive
to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product.
Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.
Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always
use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or
your ears.
Laser Safety
CAUTION: Any operations or adjustments not stated in the operation manual
may cause hazardous light exposure and eventually burn injuries or loss of
eyesight.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class 1 Laser
Equipment requirements defined by the international standard IEC60825 and
has no light exposure hazard. The product has no hazardous light emission as
it features light protection components and covers to shut in all light beam
during operation and maintenance.
Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.
To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with
the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on.
19
Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active. Keep the safety
interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally
activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.
A circuit breaker is embedded in this product. If current leakage occurs, the
circuit breaker automatically cuts off power circuit to prevent electric shock and
a fire accident. The circuit breaker is normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if
the circuit breaker works properly in accordance with the following procedures:
1) Press the TEST button. The breaker switch is turned Off ("O"). (This
means that the breaker is OK.)
2) Return the breaker switch to On ("|").
Breaker switch
1
TEST button
Breaker switch
TEST button
If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product,

particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may
cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local
Fuji Xerox representative.
Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may
cause injuries.
Be careful in removing jammed staples.
Be careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching a staple dust
box.
Waste staples may come out with output paper. Be careful not to get injured
by the staples.
Never touch safety interlocks. When a front cover is open, safety interlocks
become activated to stop the machinery. Do not apply pressure on safety
interlocks with a coin or screwdriver. Otherwise, the machinery may become
activated and cause injuries.
20
Safety Notes
Do not staple punched holes of paper. Sharp points of a staple may cause
injuries.
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may

break the glass and cause injuries.
To move this product to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the
office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room.
Provide proper ventilation to ensure safety and comfort of the office
environment.
1
Consumable
Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package
or container.
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum
cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum
cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your
local Fuji Xerox representative.
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
Keep the toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a
physician immediately.
When replacing the toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of
any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as
inhalation.
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at
least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth
with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.
21
Regulation
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR
Publ. 22) and Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning this
1 product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase the separation between this product and the receiver.
z
Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
z Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may
void the user’s authority to operate this product.
Regulatory Information for RFID

This product contains Radio Frequency Identification system device (RFID) and it is
certified in compliance with applicable local laws and/or regulations.
Product Safety Certification (CB)

This product has been tested and found to comply with IEC60950-1:ed.1 and certified
by NEMKO.
NEMKO : IEC60950-1:ed. 1
22
Environment
Environment
z Emissions of dust, ozone and styrene from this product have been tested and found

to comply with the Eco Mark criteria on chemical emission for copiers. According to
the test procedures defined by German Blue Angel RAL-UZ62: 2002, the test was
performed under the condition of monochrome copying, using the toner type
DocuColor 6075II/5065II Toner (Black) that is recommended for this product.
z
For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses
returned toner cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy
recovery.
z Proper disposal is required for drums and toner cartridges no longer needed. Do
not open drum and toner cartridge containers. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox
z
representative.
Dead rechargeable batteries that are removed from disposed machines are
1
precious resources. Fuji Xerox reuses those batteries to make recycle materials and
energy recovery. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.
z For recovery of scarce resources, Fuji Xerox reuses the rechargeable batteries used
in this product after the product is returned. Those batteries can be reused to make
recycle materials and energy recovery.
23
About License
RSA BSAFE
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.
1 Heimdal
Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology,
Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS

IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LAMA
LZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08)
http://www.7-zip.org/
LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)

http://www.7-zip.org/
24
About License
JPEG Code
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

Libcurl
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies. 1
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
FreeBSD
This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.
The FreeBSD Copyright

Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
25
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or
1 implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
OpenLDAP
Copyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the
distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or
subject to additional restrictions.
This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information con-
cerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.
This work also contains materials derived from public sources.
Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.

---
Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.
Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.
Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
---
26
About License
Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.
Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.

permitted provided that this notice is preserved.
The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software
is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.
---
1
Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this
notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann
Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is
provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.
------------------------------------------
The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"),

with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and
notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document..
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.
Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the
license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS

CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE
AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
27
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-

GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific,
written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with
copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All
Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document
is granted.
1
28
Legal Notice
Legal Notice
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines

or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of
items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.
z
Currency
z Banknotes and checks
z Bank and government bonds and securities
z Passports and identification cards
z Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
z Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
1
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or
accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.
29
2 Product Overview
This chapter describes basic operation about the machine, such as the names
of each component, switching on and off of the machine, and the operation of
the touch screen and power saving settings.
z Machine Components.................................................................................32
z Power On / Off ............................................................................................39
z Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................40
z Power Saver mode ..................................................................................... 41
z
Control panel ..............................................................................................45
2 Product Overview
Machine Components
This section describes the main components and their functions of the DocuColor
6075II/5065II (hereinafter called “the machine”).
Product Overview
32
Machine Components
No. Component Function

1 Control panel Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen.
Refer to "Control panel" (P.45).
2 Duplex automatic This automatically feeds 2 sided originals from a stack.
document feeder
3 Document glass Originals are loaded.
4 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.
Product Overview
5 Toner cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the
toner cartridge.
6 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams or replace supplies.
7 Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 Load paper here.
8 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
If the Tray 6 is installed in the machine, move the Tray 6 to the left first.
2
9 Locking casters Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after
moving the machine to its installation site.
10 Tray 6 (optional) Load paper here.
11 Tray 6 top cover Move the Tray 6 to the left and then open the top cover to clear paper
jams.
12 Tray 5 (bypass) Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other
special media) that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, and 6.
13 Tray 5 (bypass) top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
14 scanner connector Use to connect a scan cable for the Network Controller.
15 Ethernet connector Use to connect a network cable.
16 Control panel (on the right) This control panel is installed to the right of the machine.
It consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen.
33
2 Product Overview
Product Overview
34
Machine Components

17 Left cover The left cover slightly opens when the top cover is opened. Open this
cover widely to clear paper jams.
18 Top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
19 <Confirmation> indicator This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly.
20 Document guides Use this guides to align the edges of the document.
Product Overview
21 Document feeder tray Load documents here.
22 Document output tray Receives scanned documents.
23 Document stopper Used when copying or scanning large size documents such as A3.
Open the stopper rightward when using it.
24 Output tray Receives documents.
Two types of trays are available: a normal output tray and an optional
offset stacking tray.
Note • When paper whose size is less than A4 is output from the machine with
2
an offset catch tray, push in the extension flap.
25 Circuit breaker This breaker automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage
is detected.
26 Bottom right cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
If a finisher is installed in the machine, open the front cover of the
finisher first.
27 Waste toner container Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the
cover waste toner container.
28 Waste toner container Used to collect waste toner.
29 Fuser Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch
this unit as it is extremely hot.
30 Lever Used to draw out the transfer unit.
31 Transfer unit Transfers toner images on the drum to paper. Open this cover to access
the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.
32 Drum cartridges A drum cartridge comprises of photosensitive elements. Drum cartridges
are arranged in order R1, R2, R3 and R4 from the left as you face the
main body.
33 Toner cartridges Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided: Black (K1,
K2), Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).
35
2 Product Overview
A3+ high capacity tray
4
Product Overview
5 3
2
2

1 A3+ High Capacity Tray Load paper stock here.
(Tray 6) When the loaded tray is closed, the tray position is automatically
adjusted in the front/back direction based on the center of paper.
2 High Capacity Tray Unit This unit carries sheets of paper fed from the High Capacity Tray or the
Tray 5 (bypass) to the machine. Open the cover to access the inside of
the machine to clear paper jams.
3 Tray 5 (bypass) This tray is used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and
other special media) that cannot be loaded in the Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4.
4 Tray 5 (bypass) Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.
top cover
5 Circuit breaker This breaker automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage
is detected.
36
Machine Components
C-Finisher, C-Finisher with Booklet Maker
1 2
3
4
Product Overview
5
2
9 7
8

1 Punch scrap container Collects the scraps from the puncher. Draw out the box when throwing
the dust away.
2 10 bin sorter Documents can be delivered to the selected bins. This sorter has a
(C-Finisher with Booklet maximum capacity of 100 sheets of paper (P paper) per bin.
Maker with 10-bin sorter
only)
3 Output tray Receives documents.
4 Exit cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
5 Finisher tray Receives documents.
6 Staple cartridge Staples are stored. Remove this cartridge to replace staples or clear
staple jams.
7 Booklet tray Receives documents, when folding is selected in the Booklet Creation.
(C-Finisher with Booklet
Maker only)
8 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper or
staple jams, replace staples, or throw punch dust away.
9 Booklet unit This unit is for folding documents in half and stapling the folded
(C-Finisher with Booklet documents.
Maker only)
10 Booklet staple cartridge Two staple cartridges for saddle stitch are installed. Remove this
cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams.
Note • The C-Finisher and the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker are optional. In this manual, the C-
Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is abbreviated as “finisher”.
37
2 Product Overview
D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
1 2
3
4
Product Overview
2 14
13
12 6
11 10 9 8

1 Interposer (Cover/ Load Papers for covers or transparency separators. Papers loaded here
Transparency separator will not be used for copying or printing.
tray)
2 De-curl button Press this button to decurl copied paper.
3 Output tray Receives copies when you select [Automatic sorting], [Collated],
[Uncollated] or normal copy.
4 Finisher tray Receives copies when you select stapled, punched and Z-folded copies.
5 Booklet output tray Receives copies when you select Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling.
6 Booklet output tray button Press this button to deliver booklets to removal position.
7 Right cover Open to clear paper jam; replace staples or clear jammed staples; or
replace the scraps from the puncher.
8 Staple cartridges for There are two staple cartridges for booklet. Remove these cartridges to
booklet replace staples and clear staple jams.
9 Staple cartridge This cartridge contains staples. Remove this cartridge to replace staples
and clear staple jams.
10 Punch scrap container Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open throw away the scraps.
11 Tri-Fold output tray Receives copies when you select Tri-Fold in or Tri-Fold out.
12 Tri-Fold output tray button Press this button to open Tri-Fold output tray.
13 Left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.
14 Staple cartridge storage Staple cartridge for replacement can be stored.
space
Note • The D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is optional. In this manual, the D2-Finisher with Booklet
Maker is abbreviated as "finisher".
38
Power On / Off
Power On / Off
Switch on the power before operating the machine.

The machine is ready for operation within 150 seconds after the power is switched on.
The time may vary depending on the machine configuration.
Turn the machine off at the end of the day or when it is not in use for a long period of
time. Also, use [Power Saving] feature when not in use for a while to reduce the power
consumption.
Product Overview
Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.
For information about power saving feature, refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).
Powering On
The procedure for turning on the power is as follows.
1 Open the cover and press the

power switch to the [ | ] position to
2
turn the power on.
Note • The “Please wait...” message
indicates that the machine is
warming up. The machine
cannot be used while it is
warming up.
Powering Off
The procedure for turning the power off is as follows.
Important • Switching off the power of the machine during data processing stored in the memory may
cause loss of data being processed.
1 Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely
finished. Also, make sure that the Online indicator is not lit.
Important • Never turn the power off in the following instances:
• While data is being received
• While jobs are being printed
• While jobs are being copied
• While a scan is being executed
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position.

Important • Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for about 30 seconds after the
power switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet
immediately after turning the power switch off.
Note • Before you turn the power back on after turning it off, first make sure that it has been more
than 30 seconds after the touch screen went out.
39
2 Product Overview
Circuit Breaker
The machine is provided with circuit

breakers.
Breaker switch
In the event of a current leakage,
the breakers will automatically cut
off the power circuit to prevent any
leakage or fire from occurring. TEST button
The circuit breaker is normally

Product Overview
pressed to the upper side,

respectively, as shown in the figure
on the right.
If the circuit breakers are pressed to
the lower sides, respectively,
unusual conditions may occur.
Please contact our Customer
2
Support Center.
40
Power Saver mode
Power Saver mode
The machine is installed with a Power Saver feature that will automatically cut off the
electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.
The Power Saver feature has two modes, [Low Power mode] and [Sleep mode].
The machine enters the [Low Power mode] after the preset time has elapsed if the
machine is left unused for a fixed period of time. The machine then enters the [Sleep
mode] if a further preset time elapses.
Product Overview
Low Power Mode
(Power consumption: 221.6 W)
In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes
out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.
Sleep Mode 2
(Power consumption: 92.2W)
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes
out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.
Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval

The procedure for setting the Power Saver feature is as follows.
To activate the Power Saver feature, set the Sleep Mode button to Enabled, and set
both the times until the activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode.
Note • The time to activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode can each be specified in 1
minute increments, from 1 to 240 minutes.
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out>
button
41
2 Product Overview
2 Enter the system administrator

UserID with the numeric keypad or
a keyboard displayed by pressing
[Keyboard], and select [Confirm].
Note • The default system
administrator UserID value is
"11111". When using the
authentication manager
feature, a Passcode is
required. The default
Passcode value is "x-admin".
Product Overview
3 Select [System Settings].
5 Select [Common Settings].
42
Power Saver mode
6 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].
Product Overview
7 Select [Auto Power Saver], and
select [Change Settings].
8 Using [ ] [ ], configure a power

saver mode migration time in 1
minute increments.
From Last Selection to Low Power Mode

Set the time to move to the [Low Power Mode] after the last operation.
Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] is [15] minutes. The Low Power
Mode cannot be disabled.
From Last Selection to Sleep Mode

Set the time to move to the [Sleep Mode] after the last operation.
Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] is [60] minutes. Configure the [From
Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last Selection to Low Power
Mode] time.
9 Select [Save].
10 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
11 Select [Exit] to exit the System Administration mode.
43
2 Product Overview
Exiting the Power Saver Mode

The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.
The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:
z
Pressing the <Power Saver> button
z Receiving data
1 Press the <Power Saver> button.
<Power Saver>
Product Overview
button
@ @
44
Control panel
Control panel
The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.
Product Overview
2
@@ @@

1 Touch screen This display displays messages required for operation and buttons for
various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct
operations in screens and set features.
2 <Copy> Used to call a custom feature.
<Custom 2> For information about registering a feature with a button, refer to "Screen/
<Custom 3> Button Settings" (P.200).
3 <All Services> Used to display the [All Services] screen.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <All Services> button.
You can change the features that appear in the [All Services] screen.
For more information, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).
45
2 Product Overview

4 <Power Saver> If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power
consumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power
Saver mode, this button is lit. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press
this button again.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Power Saver>
button.
5 <Clear All> Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values.
The machine will be reset to the state after it is turned on.
In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the <Clear All>
Product Overview
button.
6 <Interrupt> Select this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to
give another job higher priority. During an interrupt,
the Interrupt indicator is lit. Pressing the Interrupt button again cancels
the interrupt and the previous operation is resumed.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.
2
7 <Stop> Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.
8 <Start> Press this button to start copying or scanning.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.
9 Numeric keypad Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passcodes and other
numerical values.
In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the "numeric
keypad".
10 <Speed Dial> This button cannot be used.
11 <C> (Clear) Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the
numeric keypad.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <C> button.
12 <Dial Pause> This button cannot be used.
13 <Log In/Out> When this button is pressed, if in System Administration mode, or Login
Setup/Auditron Administration is in effect, the UserID input screen is
displayed.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.
14 <Machine Status> Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status, meters
and the state of supplies, and print reports.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status>
button.
15 <Review> Press this button to open the Review screen. In this screen, you can
check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have
changed from the defaults.
In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the <Review> button.
16 <Job Status> Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing
or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.
17 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to adjust the
brightness of touch screen when it is too dark to read.
18 <Job in Memory> indicator This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.
19 <Online> indicator This indicator lights when data is being transmitted from this machine or
received from a client.
46
Control panel
Customizing the Control Panel

You can customize the <Custom> buttons and items on the [All Services] screen.
Assigning a Feature to Custom Buttons

By assigning a feature to Custom buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, and <Custom 3>),
you can switch to that feature without returning to the [All Services] screen.
The factory default settings for these buttons are, "Copy" for the 1st button, and none
for the 2nd and 3rd buttons.
For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).
Product Overview
Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If
you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down
the feature using a permanent marker and attach it to the appropriate Custom button.
Customizing the [All Services] Screen

You can customize the types of features and the location of buttons on the [All
2
Services] screen.
The following shows the factory default settings.
For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).
Note • When the feature is not available the button will not be displayed. Also, if the feature is
unavailable due to hardware problems, the button will be grayed out.
z Copy
z Network Scanning
z Web Applications
z Stored Programming
z Setup Menu
Assigning Features to <Custom> Buttons

Assign features to the <Custom> buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.
By assigning features to the <Custom> buttons, you can switch to the features without
returning to the [All Services] screen. If you do not want to assign any feature to a
button, select [Not Set].
As the factory defaults, [Copy] is assigned to the <Copy> button and no feature is
assigned to the <Custom 2> or <Custom 3> button. The features assigned to the
buttons are selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and
[Language].
Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If
you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down
the feature using a permanent marker, and then attach the label to the appropriate
button.
47
2 Product Overview
Changing feature screen

You can customize the setting screen for the following features on the [All Services]
screen.
z Copy
z Network Scanning
For information about change settings, refer to "General Settings Tab - Features Allocation" (P.225) and
"General Settings Tab" (P.241).
Product Overview
Web Applications
If you select [Web Applications] on the [All Services] screen, the screen for the Network
Controller appears.
For information on how to operate Web Applications, refer to USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the
Network Controller.
1 Select [Web Applications].

2 The screen on the right appears.
48
3 Setting up the Network
Controller
This chapter describes how to configure the Network Controller.

z Preparations ............................................................................................... 50
z
Installation Procedure .................................................................................50
Preparations
Prepare the following item to install the machine when using a TCP/IP protocol.
z
TCP/IP network environment
Installation Procedure
Setting up the Network Controller
Configuration on the Machine

To assign an IP address, it is necessary to be in the System Administration mode.The
following describes the configuration procedure for assigning an IP address.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
3
<Log In/Out>
button
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode

To enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you
are using the authentication feature, a Passcode may be required.
It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and the Passcode immediately after
installing the machine.
1 Enter the UserID with the numeric

keypad or a keyboard displayed by
selecting [Keyboard], and select
[Confirm].
Note • The default UserID value is
“11111”. When using the
Authentication feature, a
Passcode is required. The
default Passcode value is “x-
admin”.
50
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator

Menu

Step 4 Setting an IP address
2 Select [Network Controller

Settings].
51
3 Select [Network Settings].
1) Select [Ethernet Setting] and then select [Change Settings].

2) Select [TCP/IP - Get IP Address] and then select [Change Settings].
3) Select one from [DHCP], [BOOTP] or [Manual]. If you select anything other than
[Manual], proceed to Step 4.
4) Select [TCP/IP - IP Address] and then select [Change Settings].
Note • Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric value in
the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through
255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
• When you made an entry mistake, press the <C> (clear) button and enter again.
• When you move to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select [save/select next].
5) Select [Save].
6) Configure [TCP/IP - Subnet Mask] and [TCP/IP - Gateway Address] as above.
Note • Enter the gateway address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric
value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through
52
• Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252,
254, and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.
• If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".
7) Select [Frame Type] and then select [Change Settings].
5 Select [Exit].

6 After the machine is restarted, print out a settings list to confirm that the Network
Setting is configured.
For information about how to print a setting list, refer to "System Setting List" in "Print Report/List"
(P.275).
53
Configuration on the Computer
The following describes the configuration procedure for the computer.

In order to print from the machine, the computer needs to have the print driver installed.
For information about the driver installation procedure, refer to USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the
Network Controller.
54
4 Copy
This chapter describes the [Copy] screen and copy features.

z Copying Procedure ..................................................................................... 56
z Operations during Copying ......................................................................... 61
z General Settings .........................................................................................63
z Image Quality..............................................................................................74
z
Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................80
z Output Format.............................................................................................93
z
Job Assembly ...........................................................................................119
4 Copy
Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference
section for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................56
Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................58
Step 3 Entering the Quantity.......................................................................................................59
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................59
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status .....................................................................60
Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:
Document feeder
z Single sheet
z Multiple sheets
Copy
Document glass
z Single sheet
4 z Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with
sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432
mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder (250 sheets) automatically detects standard size documents. For
non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.
For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically, and for information about
entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.83).
Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size
Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer
to "Paper Size Settings" (P.219).
The document feeder (250 sheets) accepts the following number of sheets.
Number of
Document type (weight)
sheets
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250
Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250

Heavyweight paper
150
(81 - 128 g/m2)
Heavyweight paper
100
(129 - 200 g/m2)
For information about copying documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.84).
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the
document feeder.
• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) is not supported.
56
Copying Procedure
1 Remove any paper clips and

staples before loading the
documents.
2 Adjust the movable document
guides to match the size of the
document loaded.
Note • When loading a large
document such as A3, pick
up the document feeder
tray and open the
document stopper rightward.
3 Place the document face up (the
face of 2 sided document up) in the
center of the document feeder.
Note • The <Confirmation> indicator
lights up when the document
is loaded correctly.
When loading the document in the
document feeder, you can set timing for
lifting up the document feeder tray. For
more information, refer to "Document
Copy
Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.223).
Document Glass
On the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar 4
document up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard
size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.
For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.74).
1 Open the document cover.

Important • Check that the screen of the
control panel is displayed
correctly and then load the
document. When the
document is loaded before the
screen is displayed, the
machine may not properly
detect document sizes.
2 Place the document face down,

and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3 Close the document cover.
Note • When a standard size
document is placed on the
document glass, the size of
the document is displayed in
the message area.
57
4 Copy
Step 2 Selecting Features

You can select the features from the [Copy] tab.
Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model you are using.
• To use the Login Setup feature or Auditron Administration feature, you need a UserID and
Passcode, or just a UserID. Ask the system administrator for the UserID and Passcode.
1 Press the <All Services> button.

<All Services>
button
@ @
2 Select [Copy].
Copy
3 If the previous settings still remain,

press the <Clear All> button.
<Clear All>
button
@ @
4 Select the features to set from each

tab as necessary.
For information about each of these

features, refer to the following sections.
"General Settings" (P.63)
"Image Quality" (P.74)
"Layout Adjustment" (P.80)
"Output Format" (P.93)
"Job Assembly" (P.119)
58
Copying Procedure
Step 3 Entering the Quantity

You can enter up to 9,999 for the number of copies.
1 Enter the number of copies using

the numeric keypad. The number
of copies entered appears on the
upper right of the display. Numeric keypad
2 If you enter an incorrect value,

press the <C> button and enter the
correct value.
<C> button
Copy
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job
4
1 Press the <Start> button.
Important • If the document has been set
in the document feeder, do not
hold down the document while
it is being conveyed.
• Copies cannot be made when
@ @
copying restriction code is
detected. <Start> button
Note • If a problem occurs, an error

message appears in the touch
screen. Solve the problem in
accordance with the message.
• You can set the next job during copying.
If you have more documents

If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while
the current document is being scanned. You can scan multiple documents for later
output.
2 Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.
Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period
of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.
59
4 Copy
3 Load the next document.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break
the glass and cause injuries.
4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and
press the <Start> button.
5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Copy
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status
4 1 Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status>
button
2 Confirm the job status. The job type

to be displayed can be selected
from [All Jobs], [All Printing Jobs],
[All Non-printing Jobs], and
[Mailbox Transfer Jobs].
Note • Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
60
Operations during Copying
Operations during Copying
This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Stopping the Copy Job ............................................................................................................... 61
Changing the Number of Copies................................................................................................ 62
Interrupting the Copy Job........................................................................................................... 62
Stopping the Copy Job

To cancel copying, follow the procedure below.
1 Press either [Stop] on the touch

screen or the <Stop> button on the
Control Panel.
2 Select [Stop].
<Stop> button
@ @
Copy
When the screen in Step 1 does not appear
4
1 Press the <Job Status> button.
<Job Status>
button
2 Select the job to cancel, and then

select [Stop].
61
4 Copy
Changing the Number of Copies

You can change the number of copies that is set initially during scanning or copying the
document.

Control Panel.
<Stop> button
@ @
2 Select [Change Quantity...].

3 Set the number of copies with the
numeric keypad. The new quantity
must include the number of copies that have already been printed. When reducing the
quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already
been printed.
Note • You can set the values greater than the number of copies that have already copied. If you
Copy
set the same value as the number of copies that have already copied, the copy job is not
executed.
4 Interrupting the Copy Job

You can temporarily suspend the current continuous copy job to give another job higher
priority.
1 Press the <Interrupt> button.

Note • The interrupt indicator lights to
indicate that the machine is in
the job interrupt mode.
<Interrupt> button
@ @
2 Load the interrupt document and set features if necessary.

3 Set the number of copies with the numeric keypad.
5 After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.
Note • The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate the interrupt is cancelled.
• Remove the interrupt document from the document glass when using the document glass.
6 Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.
62
General Settings
General Settings
You can set the basic features on the [General Settings] screen. The following shows
the reference section for each feature.
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)................................................................ 63
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ....................................................................... 66
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) .............................................................................. 69
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 73
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)................................................................... 73
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)........................................................... 73
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) .......................................................................... 73
1 On the [All Services] screen, select

[Copy].
2 Select features on the [General
Settings] screen that appears first.
Copy
4
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)
You can select a ratio from preset standard copy ratios. You can also enter a ratio
directly.
1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a

value.
Entering the Ratio

Touch the window displaying a
value, and then use the numeric
keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons
to specify a ratio within the range of
25 to 400% in 1% increments.
100%
Copies are made at the same size as the original document.
Auto%
The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes, and the
document is copied to fit in the selected paper.
Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].
63
4 Copy
Ratio (3rd to 5th Buttons)

Select from preset ratios.
You can change the indicated ratios. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Reduce/
Enlarge - Button 3-5" (P.225).
[More...]
Display the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.
Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.64) or "When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected" (P.65).
When [Proportional %] is Selected

You can select a ratio from preset standard copy ratios. You can also enter a ratio
directly.
1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a

value.
Copy
4
100%
Copies are made at the same size as the original document.
Auto%
The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes specified
in [Paper Supply], and the document is copied to fit in the specified size.
Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].
Presets %
Select from preset ratios.
You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.238).
Copy All (Full Screen)

The document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of
the original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.
Important • If you select [Copy All], when you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the
amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the
copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.
Entering the Ratio

Touch the window displaying a value, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and
[ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
64
General Settings
When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected

You can specify different length and width ratios to scale the height and width
independently.
1 Select any item.
Auto%
Copies are made with the height
and width ratios set automatically to
match the paper size. If this option
is selected, a check mark is added.
Copy All X-Y%

The length and width ratios are set
automatically to match the paper size and the document is copied at a slightly reduced
size to prevent image loss at the edge of the original. If this option is selected, a check
mark is added.
Width X%/Length Y%
Copy
Set the length and width ratios within the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
XY
You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the
4
same amount.
When [Calculator %] is Selected

You can specify a different size for the height and width.
If you specify both the original document size and the copy size, the copy ratios for the
length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400%
according to the sizes that you entered.
1 Enter the value for the original

document width in [Original Size] of
[X] (width) using the numeric
keypad, and select [Next].
2 Enter the value for the copy size
width in [Copy Size] of [X] (width)
using the numeric keypad, and
select [Next].
3 In the same way, enter the original
document length value and copy
size length value in the [Original
Size] and [Copy Size] of [Y]
(length), and select [Next].
Note • To change the copy ratios you have entered, select [Next], move the mark, and enter the
new values.
65
4 Copy
X: width Y: length

The automatically calculated ratios based on the values entered in [Original Size] and
[Copy Size] are displayed.
Original Size
Set the length and width of the original size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.
Copy Size
Set the length and width of the copy size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)

You can select the tray loaded with the copy paper you want to use.
1 Select the paper tray from [Paper

Supply].
Copy
4
Auto Paper
Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects
the tray loaded with the appropriate paper.
Note • If you select [Auto], specify a value other than [Auto %] for [Reduce/Enlarge].
Trays (2nd to 5th Buttons)

Select from preset paper trays.
You can change the paper trays to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Preset
Buttons" (P.225).
[More...]
Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.
Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.67).
66
General Settings
[Paper Supply] Screen

You can select a paper tray that does not appear on the [General Settings] screen.
1 Select the paper tray.
Paper Tray
You can select paper from the 5
trays. When you select [Auto], the
machine automatically selects the
tray loaded with the appropriate
paper, based on the original
document size and set ratios, and
makes copies. Selecting [Tray 5
(Bypass)] opens the [Tray 5
(Bypass)] screen.
Paper Size
Displays the size of paper that is loaded in the tray.
Copy
Paper Type
Displays the type of paper that is loaded in the tray.
Size Detection 4
Displays the paper size detection method. This item appears only when [Other
Attributes] is set to [Size Detection] for [Customize Paper Supply Screen] under the
[System Settings] screen.
[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen

If you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, or 6, use
the Tray 5 (bypass).
1 Select the paper size and the paper

type.
Note • Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
Paper Size
Select from [Auto Size Detect],
[Standard Size], and [Custom Size
(Variable Size)].
When [Auto Size Detect] is
selected, the paper size is identified automatically.
Note • [Auto Size Detect] can only detect standard sizes.
Paper Type
Select the paper type.
67
4 Copy
When [Standard Size] is Selected

Select the paper size from standard sizes and select the paper type.
1 Select [Standard Size].

2 Select the paper size and paper
type.
When [Custom Size (Variable Size)] is Selected

Set the X (width) within the range from 148 to 488 mm and the Y (height) within the
range from 100 to 330 mm in increments of 1 mm.
Copy
Important • If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm, documents may not be
printed properly.
4 1 Enter the paper size using [ ],

[ ], [ ], and [ ].
2 Select the paper type.
68
General Settings
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)

You can set the output color to use when copying.
Note • If output color restrictions have been set, there are restrictions on which colors are available
for copying. For information about output color restrictions, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).
1 Select the color to use from [Output

Color]
Auto Detect
The machine automatically
determines the color of the original
document and makes copies in full
color if the original document is
color and in a single color (black) if
the document is black-and-white.
Note • The machine may make copies in black and white in the case of the following documents. In
this case change the level at which the machine distinguishes documents (5 levels) in
reference to "Output Color Recognition" (P.211).
Copy
- Colored area is very small
- In light color
Color
Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, 4
and black.
Black
The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original
document.
Dual Color (Red/Black)

The machine makes copies of color documents in two preset colors.
You can change the colors to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Dual Color
- Target Area Color" (P.226) and "Dual Color - Non-target Area Color" (P.227).
Single Color (Red)

The [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.72).
[More...]
Display the [Output Color] screen.
69
4 Copy
[Output Color] Screen

You can make color settings for full color, dual color, and single color.
1 Select [More...].
2 Select the desired output color type
for copying.
Auto Detect
The machine automatically
determines the color of the original
document and makes copies in full
color if the original document is
color and in a single color (black) if
the document is black-and-white.
Color
Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan,
and black.
Black
The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original
Copy
document.
4 Dual Color
The document is separated into specified source colors and unspecified colors and
then copied in the specified dual colors. If you select [Dual Color], you can set the
following items:
z
Source Color
The [Source Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.71).
z
Target Area Color
The [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.71).
z Non-target Area Color
The [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.72).
Single Color
The [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.72).
70
General Settings
[Source Color] Screen

Select the color to scan (extract) from the document.
1 Select [Dual Color].

2 Select [Source Color].
3 Select [Other than Black] or [Color].
4 If you selected [Color], select the

color to scan.
Other than Black

Colors other than black are
Copy
scanned.
Color
From 6 predetermined colors, you
4
can specify single or multiple colors
to scan.
[Target Area Color] Screen

You can change the color that was extracted by [Source Color] to one of the 7
predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Target Area Color]
screen, select a color.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).

2 Select [Target Area Color].
71
4 Copy
3 Select a color.
[Non-target Area Color] Screen

You can change a color that was not extracted to one of the 7 fixed colors and 6 custom
colors. From the displayed [Non-target Area Color] screen, select one color.

2 Select [Non-target Area Color].
3
Copy
Select a color.
[Output Color - Color] Screen

The machine makes copies in the single specified color regardless of the colors in the
document.
You can select a color from 6 predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the
displayed [Output Color - Color] screen, select a color.
1 Select [Single Color].
72
General Settings
2 Select [Color].
3 Select a color.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

This function works exactly as the [Color Effects] in the [Output Format] screen. For
more information, refer to "Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality)" (P.77).
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)
Copy
This function works exactly as the [Copy Output] in the [Output Format] screen. For
more information, refer to "Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)" (P.116).
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)

4
This function works exactly as the [Multiple-Up] in the [Output Format] screen. For more
information, refer to "Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)" (P.100).
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)

You can adjust the copy density to one of 7 levels. Copying is darker when you move
[ ] to the left and lighter when you move it to the right.
Note • [Lighten/Darken] of the [General Settings] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in
the [Image Quality] screen are the same.
1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select from 7

density levels.
73
4 Copy
Image Quality
On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the document image quality features.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................74
Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation) ...........................................................76
Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast) .........................................................76
Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality).....................................................................................77
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..................................................................................78
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) ............................................................................................78
Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document).......................................................................79

[Copy]
2 Select the [Image Quality] tab and
then select a feature on the [Image
Quality] screen that appears.
Copy
4
If color reproducibility is poor, perform Calibration. For information about calibration, refer to
"Executing Calibration" (P.310).
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)

When making copies of photographs, text and other documents, you can make copies
at the image quality corresponding to each type of document. Copies of the document
can be reproduced at a more faithful image quality by selecting the document type that
matches the document.
1 Select [Original Type].

2 Select the document type.
74
Image Quality
Auto
This item sets [Output Color] of the [General Settings] screen according to the
document type preset in the System Administration mode.
For information about the auto setting of [Original Type], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.226).
Photo & Text

Select when making copies of documents containing both text and photos. The
machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate
image quality for each area of the document. For photo areas, specify the photo type
from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].
z
Printed Original
Select when photo areas of the document is printed matter such as a pamphlet.
z Photograph
Select when photos have been pasted on document. This prevents the copy from
being reproduced bluish.
z Photocopy
Select this item for documents that are copies or prints made on a color copier such
as the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. This prevents colors from being reproduced faint.
Copy
Text
Select this item to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of graphs, illustrations, etc.
are also made in this mode.
z
Normal Text
4
Select this item for printed documents, inked text documents, etc.
z Light Text
Select this item for documents with light image density such as a document written
in pencil, to increase the copy density.
z Lightweight originals
Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing paper documents or to suppress
background shadows of lightweight documents.
Note • Whether [Lightweight originals] is displayed depends on the specifications. For information
about the display method, refer to "Original Type - Lightweight Originals" (P.233).
Photo
Select this item for making copies of photos. In the same way as for Photo & Text,
specify the photo type from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].
Map
Select this item for making copies of documents that have text on colored backgrounds
such as maps.
75
4 Copy
Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation)

You can make copies with adjusting the copy density, sharpness and color saturation.
Note • [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same.
• If [Lighten/Darken], [Sharpness] or [Saturation] is selected when the Color Effects is set, the
values set in the Color Effects are cleared.
1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].
Lighten/Darken
You can select from seven copy
density levels between [Lighten]
and [Darken].
The copy color density increases the
nearer the level is to [Darken] and
the copy color density decreases the
nearer the level is to [Lighten].
Sharpness
Copy
You can select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].
The nearer the level is to [Sharpen], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer
4 the level is to [Soften], the softer the contours of images.
Saturation
You can select from five color saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel].
The brightness of color in documents increases the nearer the level is to [Vivid] and the
brightness of color in documents decreases the nearer the level is to [Pastel].
Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast)

When copies are made with [Black] of [Output Color], the background color of
documents such as newspapers and colored paper documents is erased.
When making copies with [Full Color], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color] of [Output Color],
the background of white documents is erased.
Note • When [Document Type] is set to [Photo], the [Auto Exposure] feature does not work.
1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Select [Background Suppression]
and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with
[ ] and [ ].
Background Suppression
z
No Suppression
Scans the document
backgrounds with no filtering.
z Auto Suppression
When copies are made with
[Black] of Output Color, the background color of documents such as newspaper and
colored paper documents is erased.
76
Image Quality
When copies are made with [Color], [Dual Color], or [Single Color] of [Output Color],
the background of white documents is erased.
Contrast
z Auto Correction
This setting sharpens the image by adjusting the brightness and hue of the original.
z Manual Contrast
You can select from 5 contrast levels between [More Contrast] and [Less Contrast].
The nearer the level is to [More Contrast], the greater the difference between light
parts and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker.
[Less Contrast] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark area.
Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality)

If you select an image quality of [Image Quality Preset], the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/
Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance]
settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at a quality that matches the
images.
Note • If the settings of other image quality features are changed after selecting an image quality in
Copy
[Image Quality Preset], the Color Effects setting will return to its default (state of nothing
being selected).
1
2
Select [Color Effects].
Select the image quality.
4
Normal
Copies are made with the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/
Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults.
Lively
The color saturation is raised to reproduce images that appear fresher and livelier.
Bright
Reproduces images that have a brighter appearance with enhanced contrast. Select
this item to make copies of documents such as posters that are intended to attract
people's attention.
Warm
Reproduces colors that have a slightly low density as brighter and warmer colors with
more dominant red in them. Select this item when, for example, you wish skin to appear
pinker or subdued warm colors to have more warmth.
77
4 Copy
Cool
Reproduces blue colors that appear even clearer. Select this item, for example to make
water or sky bluer or to reproduce subdued cold colors more clearly.
Shadow Suppression
This setting supresses document.
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)

The strength of the four colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) can be adjusted in 7
levels for each of their low, medium, and high density ranges.
Note • If [Color Balance] is selected when the Color Effects is set, the values set in the Image
Quality Preset are cleared.
1 Select [Color Balance].

2 Select the button for the color you
want to adjust.
3 Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color
balance for each density.
Copy
Low Density
4 Use this item to adjust the strength

of the low density.
Medium Density
Use this item to adjust the strength of the medium density.
High Density
Use this item to adjust the strength of the high density.
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone)

The tone of color documents can be adjusted to make subtle changes to the overall
tone of the document. You can adjust the tone 2 levels at a time by moving the bar to
the left or right.
The bottom bar of the [Color Shift] screen indicates the tone of the document and the
upper bar indicates the tone after adjustment. If you select a color shift button, you can
move the lower bar to change the overall tone of the document to the tone of the upper
bar.
For example, if Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the left towards R (red) on the
upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes reddish to give an apple a riper-looking tone. This
changes all colors. For example, R (red) becomes more M (magenta) and G (green)
becomes more Y (yellow).
If Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the right towards G (green) on the upper bar,
the yellow in fruit becomes greener. This changes all colors. For example, M (magenta)
becomes more R (red) and R (red) becomes more Y (yellow).
Note • Confirm that [Full Color] is selected in [Output Color] of the [General Settings] screen. Tone
adjustment is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black].
• If [Color Shift] is selected when Color Effects is set, the values set in the Color Effects are
cleared.
78
Image Quality
1 Select [Color Shift].

2 Select the color shift buttons.
Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document)

This feature lowers the copying speed to add a glossy touch to the output.
The following paper can be used for the gloss level feature:
Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2),
heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), coated paper (106 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2),
Copy
and punched paper.
Note • A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display [Gloss Level] in the
4
[Image Quality] tab. For more information, refer to "Gloss Level" (P.223).
• When you use the Build Job features, [Gloss Level] can be set to each set of the job. In this
case, the copy procedure may pause due to adjustment of the machine when changing the
settings. In addition, the document is divided into chapters at the positions where the gloss
level changes.
1 Select [Gloss Level].

2 Select [Normal] or [Enhanced].
79
4 Copy
Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning
documents.
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...................................................80
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) .................................................82
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................83
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .........................84
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .........................................85
Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).........................................................................87
Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)...............89
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ...................................................................90
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents).......................................91
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) .................................................................................91

[Copy].
2 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab
Copy
and then select a feature on the

[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)

The Book Copying feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate
sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make separate
copies from facing pages of bound documents such as a booklet.
Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
• When you want to make copies in page order, select [Face Down] from [Output Orientation]
in the [Output Format] tab.
1 Select [Book Copying]

2 Select any item.
Off
The document is not copied as a
bound document.
80
Layout Adjustment
Left Page then Right

Copies are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left
page.
Right Page then Left

Copies are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the
right page.
Top Page then Bottom

Copies are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top
page.
Both Pages
Copies are made of both pages of facing paper in page order.
Left Page Only

Copies are made of the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.
Right Page Only

Copies are made of the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Copy
Top Page Only

Copies are made of the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then 4
Bottom] is selected.
Bottom Page Only

Copies are made of the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page
then Bottom] is selected.
Binding Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding
erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
81
4 Copy
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)

You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so
that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the
start page and the end page from the left and right facing pages.
Note • Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1 Select [2 Sided Book Copy].

2 Select any item.
Off
The document is not copied as a 2
sided book copy.

Copies are made of both pages from the left page of facing pages in a document
Copy
starting from the left page.

4 Copies are made of both pages from the right page of facing pages in a document
starting from the right page.
Top Page then Bottom

Copies are made of both pages from the top page of facing pages in a document
starting from the top page.
Start Page & End Page

Displays the [2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] screen.
Refer to "[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen" (P.82).
Binding Erase
[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen

You can set the copy start page and end page.
1 Select [Start Page] and [End

Page].
Start Page
Select the copy start page from the
following items.
82
Layout Adjustment
z [Left Page]/[Right Page]

You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
End Page
Select the copy end page from the following items.
z [Left Page]/[Right Page]
You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)

You can set the scan size for the document.
Copy
Specify the size of the document when scanning non-standard size documents or when
making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document.
When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the
size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to copy the document with adding
or deleting the margin.
4
1 Select [Original Size].
2 Select the size of the document.
If you select a non-standard size,
specify values for the X and Y
directions.
Auto Size Detect

Scan sizes are detected
automatically. The machine can
auto-detect the following paper
sizes.
Document feeder Document glass

Auto-detectable sizes B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6,
A4 , A3, 8.5x11", 8.5x11" , A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3,
11x17", Kai16 , Kai8 8.5x11", Kai16, Kai16 , Kai8
Note • If the document size cannot be detected, a screen to input the document size appears.
• Auto-detectable sizes vary depending on the settings made for [Auto Tray Switching] in the
System Administration mode. For more information about [Auto Tray Switching], refer to
[Common Settings] of "6 System Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Standard Size
Select a document size from a list of 17 pre-configured types.
83
4 Copy
You can change the indicated document sizes. For more information, refer to "Original Size Defaults"
(P.237).
Variable Size
Enter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when
making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the
size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and
in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The
scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the
document size.
Important • When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height)
direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan size becomes from 50
mm above to 50 mm below the center of the document.
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents

Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size
documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the
documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on so that copies
are made on the same size of paper.
Copy
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]
setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
4
• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.
• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place
the B5 document also in a vertical direction.
• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5
portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our
recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.
Note • [Original Orientation] is set in reference to the direction set for the first page of the document.
Load the rest of the document from the second page onwards in the same direction as that
of the first page of the document.
1 Select [Mixed Sized Originals]

2 Select [On] or [Off].
Off
Select this item when all documents
are of the same size.
On
When documents of different sizes
are copied, the machine
automatically detects the size of
each document.
84
Layout Adjustment
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)

In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must
be configured.
Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine
may incorrectly detect the head of the document.
Upright Images
Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the
document glass or document feeder.
Sideway Images
Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the
document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Sideway Images] when the top
of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)

When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book,
Copy
black shadows sometimes appear along the edges and center margin of the paper. If
this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
4
Note • For 2-sided documents, the same border erase amount is set for the top and bottom sides.
• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in
proportion to the ratio you configured.
1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Make the necessary settings.
Normal
The border erase amount is set to 2
mm for the top and bottom, and left
and right. If you do not want to
erase the edges, set each value to
0 mm.
Border Erase
Shadows at the top/bottom/left/right
of the document, or shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or
documents with facing pages, are erased. Border Erase allows adjustment of the erase
amount for each edge or center (gutter) individually.
Edge Erase
Shadows at the top/bottom/left/right of the document, or shadows in the center of
documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages, are erased. Standard
Edge Erase allows adjustment of the erase amount for top, bottom, left, right, or center
(gutter) individually.
85
4 Copy
Margin Erase
Shadows at the top/bottom/left/right of the document, or shadows in the center of
documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages, are erased. Standard
Edge Erase allows adjustment of the erase amount for top/bottom, left/right, or center
(gutter) individually.
Erase Value
You can erase only the necessary amount.
z
Top & Bottom Edges
Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and
bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded.
You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
z Left & Right Edges
Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right
are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can
set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z Binding Erase
Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing
Copy
pages are erased. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50
mm in 1 mm increments.
4 Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)

be configured.
z
Upright Images
z
Sideway Images
document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Sideway Images] when the
top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).
Side 2
This item is available only when [Standard Edge Erase] is selected. You can select
whether to apply the same deletion widths to Sides 1 and 2.
z Same as Side 1
The same deletion widths are applied to Sides 1 and 2.
z Opposite to Side 1
The deletion widths are mirrored on Side 1 and 2.
86
Layout Adjustment
Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)

Copies can be made with the document image position shifted to the left, right, top, or
bottom of the paper or with the document center shifted to the center of the paper. You
can also make copies with a margin added to the top, bottom, left, or right. When
making 2 sided prints, you can set the shift positions for both Side 1 and Side 2.
Note • The image shift amount is set in accordance with the paper. Even if you set copies to be
enlarged or reduced in Reduce/Enlarge, the image shift amount is not affected.
1 Select [Image Shift].

2 Select any item.
No Shift
The position of the document image
is not shifted.
Auto Center
The center of the document is
Copy
shifted to match the center of the
paper.
Margin Shift 4
You can set the margin amount. Set the top & bottom, and left & right values within the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
z Side 1
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.88).
z Side 2
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.88).
Mirror Shift
Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of
Side 1.

be configured.
z Upright Images
z Sideway Images
87
4 Copy
[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen

You can set the image shift of Side 1.
1 Select any item.
No Shift
The position of the document image
is not shifted.
Auto Center
The center of the document is
shifted to match the center of the
paper.
Corner Shift
The document image is shifted to
the edges or corners of the paper.
You can select from 8 shift
directions.
Copy
When adjusting the margin amount,

set the top and bottom, and left and
4 right values within the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Variable Shift
You can set the margin amount. Set
the top and bottom, and left and
right values within the range from 0
to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen

You can set the image shift of Side 2.
No Shift
The position of the document image is not shifted.
Auto Center
The center of the document is shifted to match the center of the paper.
Corner Shift
The document image is shifted to the edges or corners of the paper. You can select
from 8 shift directions.
88
Layout Adjustment
When adjusting the margin amount, set the top and bottom, and left and right values
within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Variable Shift
You can set the margin amount. Set the top and bottom, and left and right values within
the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
Image Rotation
(Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)
If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the
document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to
make copies with the document and paper orientations matched. You can also select
where to use as a reference for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.
The image rotation feature can only be used to make copies to paper of A4 and 8.5 x
11 inches or smaller.
1 Select [Image Rotation].

2 Select any item.
Copy
Off
4
Copies of documents are made as
they are, even if they are orientated
differently.
Always On
The document image is automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document
matches that of the paper.
On during Auto

The document image is automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document
matches that of the paper when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto Paper] of [Paper
Supply] is selected.
Rotation Direction
Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.
Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.90).
89
4 Copy
[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen

You can set the reference position for rotation.
1 Select [Rotation Direction].

2 Select any item.
Staple Position
When the finisher is installed,
[Staple Position] is displayed. If
documents are of mixed
orientations, images will be rotated
to match the stapling edge based
on the staple feature settings.
Portrait Original - Left Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of a
landscape document is aligned with the left edge of a portrait document.
Copy
Portrait Original - Right Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge
4
of a landscape document is aligned with the right edge of a portrait document.
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)

Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed or
the colors reversed in Output Color of the document image.
Note • When Output Color is set to Black or Single Color, the density (contrast) is reversed for black
and white.
• When Output Color is set to Full Color, the complementary colors are reversed.
• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns
to white.
1 Select [Invert Image]

2 Select any item.
Mirror Image
The left and right sides of the
document image are reversed.
Negative Image
The density (contrast) of the
document image is reversed.
90
Layout Adjustment

be configured.
1 Select [Original Orientation].

2 Select [Upright Images] or
[Sideways Images] in accordance
with the orientation of the
document loaded.
Upright Images
Select this item when placing the
top of the document facing the inner
side of the document glass or
document feeder.
Sideway Images
Copy
4
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)
Copies of 1 sided and 2 sided documents can be made on one side or both sides.
1 Select [2 Sided Copying].

2 Select any item.
1 1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1 sided
document on one side of the paper.
1 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1 sided
document on both sides of the
paper.
2 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper.
2 1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on one side of the paper.
91
4 Copy
Originals
z Head to Head
Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the same
orientation.
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the opposite
orientation. This appears when [2 - 2 Sided] or [2 - 1 Sided] is selected.
Copies
z Head to Head
Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the
copy to be the same as that of the document.
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the
copy to be the opposite of that of the document. This appears when [1 - 2 Sided] or
[2 - 2 Sided] is selected.

Copy
be configured.
4
z Upright Images
z Sideway Images
92
Output Format
Output Format
On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents.
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)....................................................................................... 94
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ....................................................................................... 97
Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)............................. 99
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)......................................................... 100
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).............................................. 101
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) .......................................................... 102
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies) ..................................................... 103
Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background) .......................................................... 110
Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) .............................................................................. 113
Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down) ................................................................. 114
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper) ..................................................................................... 115
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ......................................... 115
2 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies) .............................................................................. 116
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)................................................................. 116
Copy
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................................... 118
2
[Copy]
Select the [Output Format] tab and
4
then select a feature on the [Output
Format] screen.
93
4 Copy
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)

The machine can copy pages laid out so as when multiple-page sheets are overlaid
and folded along the center (gutter), a booklet is created in page order. You can also
set the binding shift and attach a cover when binding documents.
When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, [Folding Only] or [Fold & Staple]
becomes available.
Note • If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be
blank pages.
• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically
selected. Change the settings if necessary. For more information, refer to "Auto Paper Off"
(P.232).
1 Select [Booklet Creation].

2 Select any item.
Off
Copy
Booklet Creation is not applied to

copies.
4 On - Create Booklet

Copies are made to enable left
binding or top binding.
On - Right Bind Create Booklet

Copies are made to enable right binding.
On - Do not create Booklet

You can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Fold &
Staple Options. Select this item when you do not need a document to be copied in page
order.
Covers
You can make copies with a cover attached.
z
No Covers
No cover is added.
z Blank Covers
A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.
z Font Cover - 2 Sided
The first and second pages of the original are used as the cover.
z Front & Back Covers - Print Outside
The first page of the original is used as the outer page of the cover.
z
Last Page on Back Cover
The last page of the original is used as the back cover of the booklet. Select the
check box to use the last page as the back cover. When using [Divide Output] to
separate booklets, the cover will be made on the last page of the last subset.
94
Output Format
Note • Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank sheet may be inserted before the
last page.
Binding Shift
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen" (P.95).
Divide Output
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output ] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] Screen" (P.95).
Fold & Staple Options

Displays the [Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple Options] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation- Fold & Staple Options] Screen" (P.96).
Paper Tray Settings

Displays the [Booklet Creation-Covers-Paper Tray Settings] screen.
Select the tray to use from [Main Body Tray] and [Covers Tray]. Select trays with paper
of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen"
Copy
(P.67).
[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen

You can specify a ratio within the range from 0 to 50mm in 1 mm increments. 4
1 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify a
binding shift value.
[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] Screen

When you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets
to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles
them up to form a booklet. This feature can be set to from 1 to 50 pages in 1 page
increments.
Note • When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.
95
4 Copy
1 Select [On].
2 Set the number of copies using [ ]
and [ ] or with the numeric
keypad.
[Booklet Creation- Fold & Staple Options] Screen

When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, [Folding Only] or [Fold & Staple]
becomes available.
1 Select any item.

Copy
4 No Fold & Staple

No Finishing is carried out.
Folding Only
Outputting copies folded in half.
The number of copies that can be
folded is 5. When the number is
more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.
Fold & Staple

The copies are folded in half and stapled at the center.
The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15.
96
Output Format
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)

You can make copies with a cover attached.
The front cover can be output before the first page of the document on a different type
of paper (e.g. colored paper or heavyweight paper).
Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum
that the machine can scan, the document already scanned cannot be printed. In this case,
cancel the job following the message displayed. The number of the document pages that
can be scanned is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the total numbers are about 1,500
pages for color documents or about 6,000 pages for black and white documents, if the
document size is A4 (Xerox standard document). This figure could be used only as a
guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depends on the types, sizes and
direction of the document.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• When making 2 sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in
accordance with the page order of the document.
(P.232).
1 Select [Covers].
2
Copy
Select any item.
Front Cover
Setting front cover for the first page can be done.
z
No Covers
A cover is not attached.
z
Blank Covers
z
Printed Cover - Print Outside
The document is copied on the external sides of front cover from the first page.
Select when you want to copy only on the external side of the front cover.
z Printed Cover - Print Inside
The document is copied on the internal sides of front cover from the first page. Select
when you want to copy only on the internal side of the front cover.
97
4 Copy
z Printed Cover - 2 Sided

The document is copied to the both sides of cover from the first page. Select when
you want to copy on both sides.
Back Cover
Setting back cover for the last page can be made. When attaching a back cover, you
need to scan a document corresponding to the back cover first.
z No Covers
A cover is not attached.
z
Blank Covers
z Printed Cover - Print Outside
Copies one document applicable to a back cover on the external side of the back
cover.
z Printed Cover - Print Inside
Copies one document applicable to a back cover on the internal side of the back
cover.
Copy
z Printed Cover - 2 Sided

Copies two documents applicable to a back cover on the both sides of the back
cover.
4 Paper Tray Settings
Displays the [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] screen.
Select the paper tray to use from [Front Cover Tray], [Back Cover Tray] and [Main Body
Tray]. When pasting image to the cover, select trays with paper of the same size and
orientation for the text and the cover.
Front Cover
Select the tray to be used for the front cover sheet.
Back Cover
Select the tray to be used for the back cover sheet.
Main Body
Select the tray to be used for the body sheet.
98
Output Format
[Front Cover Quantity]

You can specify the number of cover sheets used for front cover in the range between
1 and 99 for insertion. Prints the front cover equally as the body text, even if multiple
number of copies are made.
1 Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric

keypad to specify necessary
number of sheets are loaded.
Transparency Separators
(Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)
Copy
A blank sheet can be output inserted as a separator between copied transparencies.
At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed. When
loading transparencies, make sure that the paper for the separators (or for distribution)
is loaded at the same orientation as that of the transparencies.
Important • Use V516 (Xerox film [no border]) transparency sheets. Using transparency sheets for color
4
(V556/V558 [with white boarder]) may cause a malfunction or paper jam.
Note • When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them
vertically.
• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is automatically
selected. Change the settings if necessary.
1 Select [Transparency Separators].

2 Select any item.
No Separators
Transparency separators are not used.
Blank Separators
A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied.
Only one set of copies can be made.
Blank Separators & Handouts

A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied.
At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.
99
4 Copy
Transparency Set & Handouts

Copies are made on transparencies and only the required number of copies for
distribution is printed.
Paper Tray Settings

Displays the [Transparency Tray - Separators Tray] screen. Select each paper tray to
use.
From [Transparency Tray], select transparency size and orientation. From [Separators
Tray], select the tray to be used. Select trays with paper of the same size and
orientation for the transparency and the separators (N Sets).
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)

2, 4, or 8 sheets of documents can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
When you select [Multiple Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically.
The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that
they fit on the selected paper.
Note • When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss
Copy
may occur depending on the document image size of the document.

• When margin shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image
4
loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the document image size of the
document.
• When Edge Erase is set, edges are erased for each document copied to the whole
document.
• Select the other than [Auto] for the paper tray of [Paper Supply] on the [General Settings]
screen. If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is
automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary.
1 Select [Multiple-Up].
2 Select any item.
1 Page Up
Multiple-Up is not applied.
2 Pages Up
Two document sheets can be
copied together onto a single sheet
of paper.
4 Pages Up
Four document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
8 Pages Up
Eight document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
Reading Order
You can select the layout for copying the documents together.
100
Output Format

be configured.
z Upright Images
z Sideway Images
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)

An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.
This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread
over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can
be pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.
Copy
Note • This feature is not supported by the document feeder.
4
1 Select [Poster].
2 Select [Output Size] or
[Enlargement %].
No Posters
Poster is not applied to copies.
Output Size
You can select a paper size.
Enlargement %
Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.102).
Paper Tray Settings

Displays the [Poster - Paper Tray Settings] screen.
Select the paper tray to use.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5
(Bypass)] Screen" (P.67).
101
4 Copy
When [Enlargement %] is Selected

You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.
1 Select [Enlargement %].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the
height and width ratios.
Width X/Length Y
Set the height and width ratios
within the range from 100 to 400%
in 1% increments.
XY
You can simultaneously change the
numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)

Copy
A document image can be copied on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified
number of times.
4
When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to
fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image
are arranged.
Note • When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of
repeats that will fit on the paper.
(P.232).
1 Select [Repeat Image].

2 Select [Auto Repeat] or [Variable
Repeat].
1 Page Up
Image Repeat is not applied.
Auto Repeat
The machine automatically sets the
number of copies according to the
document size, paper size, and
copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.
Note • Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.
Variable Repeat
Specify the number of times to repeatedly copy the document image along each of the
long and short sides of the paper. You can specify from 1 to 23 repeats along the long
side (Y) and from 1 to 33 repeats along the short side (X).
102
Output Format
Image Layout
z Evenly Spaced
The specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.
z Side by Side
The specified number of images are arranged with no clearance on the paper.
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)

You can add a stamp, date, and page number not included on the document to copy
paper when outputting copies.
You can select from already provided formats for the stamp type, date, page number,
and printing position.
guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depend of the types, sizes and
Copy
Note • The annotation image and character size is not changed even if you set the enlarge/reduce
setting.
• If Stamp, Date, and Page Number are specified at the same time, we recommend confirming
that none of the positions overlap before making copies. 4
• If [Multiple-Up] is set, the annotation is added to the combined image.
• If [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] is set, the annotation is added to each individual
image.
1 Select [Annotation].
2 Select any item.
Stamp
Displays the [Stamp] screen.
Refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).
Date
Displays the [Date] screen.
Page Number
Displays the [Page Number] screen.
103
4 Copy
Bates Stamping
Displays the [Bates Stamping] screen.

be configured.
z Upright Images
z
Sideway Images
[Stamp] Screen
You can set the style and position of the stamp.
Copy
1 Select any item
4
Off
No stamp is added.
On
A stamp is added.
Text
Displays the [Stamp-Text] screen.
You can select the text for stamp. You can specify text from 8 preset text or the text set
in the System Administration mode.
For information on how to register text, refer to "Custom Text 1 to 3" (P.217).
Print On…
Displays the [Stamp - Print On] screen.
You can select the page(s) to print the stamp from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].
Position
Displays the [Stamp - Position] screen.
You can select from 9 positions for the stamp.
In addition, you can select the stamp position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1]
or [Opposite to Side 1].
Detailed Settings
Displays the [Stamp - Detailed Settings] screen.
You can select from 3 sizes and 7 colors for the stamp. You can set the stamp size in
the range from 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments.
104
Output Format
If [Date] and [Page Number] are both set, specify [Black] for stamp color.
[Date] Screen
You can make copies with a date added. The printed date is the date and time that the
printing was started.
For information about the date display format, refer to "Date" (P.195).
1 Select any item.
Off
No date is added.
On
A date is added.
Print On...
Displays the [Date - Print On] screen.
Copy
You can select to print the date on the first page only or to print on all pages.
4
Position
Displays the [Date - Position] screen.
You can select from 6 positions for the date.
In addition, you can select the date position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1] or
[Opposite to Side 1].
Size
Displays the [Date - Size] screen.
You can select from 3 sizes for the stamp. You can also specify the stamp size in the
range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.
[Page Number] Screen

You can add a page number to copies.
1 Select any item.
Off
No page number is added.
On
A page number is added.
105
4 Copy
Style
You can select from the 6 numbers for the page.
z 1, 2, 3
Only page number is added.
z -1-, -2-, -3-
A hyphen is added to the left and right of the page number. (Example: -1-)
z Page1, Page2, Page3
"Page" is added in front of the page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)
z 1/N, 2/N, 3/N...
The total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example:
1/50, 2/50)
When selecting [1/N,2/N,....], the value specified in [Annotation - Page Number -
Total Page (N)] screen is available.
z
-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-
Put total page number beside the right of page number and hyphen the right and left
of the page and total page number. (Example: -1/50, -2/50-)
When selecting [1/N,2/N,....], the value specified in [Annotation - Page Number -
Copy
Total Page (N)] screen is available.

z Page1/N, Page2/N, Page3/N...
4 "Page" is added in front of the page number and the total number of pages is added
to the right side of the page number. (Example: Page1/50, Page2/50)
When selecting [Page1/N-, Page2/N-,...], the value specified in [Annotation - Page
Number - Total Page(N)] screen is available.
z
Total Pages (N)
[Annotation - Page Number -Total Page (N)] screen appears.
z Auto
The number of pages of the document is automatically counted as the total number
of pages.
z Enter Number
You can specify the total number of pages within the range from 1 to 999.
Print On
Displays the [Page Number - Print On] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Page Number - Print On] Screen" (P.107).
Position
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number - Position] screen.
You can select from six positions for the page number.
In addition, you can select the page number position for Side 2, from either [Same as
Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].
Size
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number - Size] screen.
You can select from 3 sizes for the page number. You can set size in the range from 6
to 24 points in 1 point increments.
106
Output Format
[Page Number - Print On] Screen

You can specify the page(s) to add a page number.
1 Select any item.
All Pages
A page number is added to all
pages.
Enter Start Page Number

Specify the first page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the first page
number.
Copy
Enter End Page Number
Specify the last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the last page 4
number.
Enter Start and End Page Number

Specify the start and last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start and last
page numbers.
Include Covers/Separators
This item is available only when [All Pages] is selected. Add a check to include a cover
or separators.
Note • You cannot make copies on the paper (Covers/Transparency Separators) loaded in the tray
8 (interposer).
Start Number
Specify the start number for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999. To
enter the number with the numeric keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and
then enter the number.
107
4 Copy
[Bates Stamping] Screen

You can add text and a page number with a character string to copies.
1 Select any item.
Off
No character string and page
number is added.
On
A character string with page number is added.
Prefix
Copy
Use the pop-up keypad to enter a character string. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters

can be set.
4 Number of Digits
[Bates Stamping - Number of Digits] screen appears.
Use this option to specify the number of digits for page numbers. There is a choice of
auto and manual settings. You can set the digit number in the range from 1 to 9 digits
in 1 increments.
Print On
Displays the [Bates Stamping - Print On] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Page Number - Print On] Screen" (P.107).
Position
Displays the [Bates Stamping - Position] screen.
You can select from six positions for the bates stamping.
In addition, you can select the bates stamping position for Side 2, from either [Same as
Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].
Size
Displays the [Bates Stamping - Size] screen.
You can select from 3 sizes for the page number. You can set size in the range from 6
to 24 points in 1 point increments.
108
Output Format
[Bates Stamping - Print On] Screen

You can specify the page(s) to add text and a page number.
1 Select any item.
All Pages
A page number is added to all
pages.
Enter Start Page Number

Specify the first page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the first page
number.
Copy
Enter End Page Number
Specify the last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the last page 4
number.
Enter Start and End Page Number

Specify the start and last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start and last
page numbers.
Include Covers/Separators
This item is available only when [All Pages] is selected. Add a check to include a cover
or separators.
Note • You cannot make copies on the paper (Covers/Transparency Separators) loaded in the tray
8 (interposer).
Start Number
Specify the start number for adding page numbers. When [Number of Digits] is not
specified, enter a value between 1 and 999999999 digits. When [Number of Digits] is
specified, enter a value in a specified range. To enter the number with the numeric
keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and then enter the number.
Note • When the page number exceeds the specified digits during copying, copying is cancelled.
109
4 Copy
Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background)

You can faintly print a sequential control number on the background of each copy set.
For example, if you set “1” for the start page, “1” is printed on all page of the first copy
set and “2” is printed on all pages of the second set.
To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents for distribution at
conferences, you can use sequential numbering to associate distribution copies to
people.
guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depend of the types, sizes and
1 Select [Watermark].
2 Select any item.
Control Number - Off

No control numbers are printed.
Copy
Control Number - On
4 Control numbers are printed.
Start Number
You can set a control number within
the range from 1 to 9999. When you
put control number, use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric keypad to enter the start number.
Text
Displays the [Watermark - Text] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Watermark - Text] Screen" (P.111).
Date & Time

You can print the date and time that copying started. Check when printing the date.
For information about the format for the date, refer to "Date Format" (P.216).
Serial Number
The serial number of the machine is printed. Check when printing the serial number.
110
Output Format

be configured.
z Upright Images
z Sideway Images
Text Effect
Displays the [Watermark - Text Effect] screen.
For more information refer to "[Watermark - Text Effect] Screen" (P.112).
[Watermark - Text] Screen

You can select from three character types for the Watermark.
Copy
1 Select [On].
Select any item.
4
Off
No text is printed.
On
Text is printed. You can select the
text for stamp. You can specify text
from 3 preset text or the text set in
the System Administration mode.
For information on how to register text, refer to "Custom Text 1 to 3" (P.217).
111
4 Copy
[Watermark - Text Effect] Screen

You can set the text effect.
If you set a text effect and make a copy, text strings specified in [Control Number],
[Text], [Date & Time], and [Serial Number] of the [Watermark] screen are embedded in
the background. When making a copy of a document that has been copied with Text
Effect, the embedded text on the output copy is either printed in an embossed or outline
state.
1 Select any item.

Copy
4 Off
Print the specified text as it is.
Embossed
When making a copy of a document that has been copied with the text effect, the
embedded text on the output copy is printed in an embossed state.
Outline
When making a copy of a document that has been copied with the text effect, the
embedded text on the output copy is printed in an outline state.
For information on the background patterns, refer to "Background Pattern" (P.217).
112
Output Format
Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper)

You can copy images from a document tab paper by specifying the copied position, so
that the image would be copied onto the tab.
Sizes of Tab paper can be copied are A4 , 8.5 x 11 inches .
An available tray for this feature is only the Tray 5 (bypass). When loading the tab paper
in the Tray 5 (bypass), load the paper with the side to be copied facing up and with the
edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.
1 Select [Tab Margin Shift].

2 Select any item.
Off
No copied on the tab paper.
Shift to Tab
Copy
Copy the image on the edge of the document to the only the tab part of the paper.
Specify the Shift Value to shift the image being on the edge of the document so that the
image would be copied onto the tab. (Enter the Shift Value to shift the image of the
document onto the tab for copying.) Only the image shifted can be copied.
4
Shift All
Copy whole image of the document to the index paper.
Specify the [Shift Value] when you also wish to shift the image on the edge of the
document onto the tab for copying.
Shift Value
Specify the position to shift within the range of 0 to 15 mm.
Paper Supply
Select paper tray for loading tab paper.
Tab Stock Size

Select the size of tab paper.
Tab Stock Type

Select the quality of tab paper.
113
4 Copy
Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)

You can select whether copies should be output facing up or down.
1 Select [Output Orientation].

2 Select any item.
Auto
Automatically determines whether
the copies should be output facing
up or down.
Face Up
Copies are output facing up and
delivered from the last page.
Face Down
Copies are output facing down and delivered from the last page.
Face Up (Reverse Order)

Copies are delivered from the first page facing up.
Copy
Note • Whether [Face Up Reverse Order] is displayed depends on the system setting. For
information, refer to "Output Orientation - Reverse Order" (P.233).
114
Output Format
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper)

You can make copies to be folded in half.
• The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .
1 Select [Folding].
2 Select any item.
None
A copy is not folded.
Z Tri-Fold
Copies are folded in three with the
printed side inside.
C Tri-Fold
Copies are folded in three with the
Copy
printed side outside.
Bi-Fold
Copies are folded in half.
4
Print Inside
Folds copies so that the image is printed inside.
Print Outside
Folds copies so that the image is printed outside.
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)

Repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified
number of copies.
Note • When anything other than [Auto%] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur
at edges depending on the image size of the document.
1 Select [Preset Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.
1 Page Up
One copy of the document image is
made on a single sheet of paper.
2 Pages Up
Two copies of the document image
are made on a single sheet of
paper.
115
4 Copy
4 Pages Up
Four copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.
8 Pages Up
Eight copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.91).
Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)

You can specify the copy output method.
If the offset stacking module is installed, the output position of copies is offset
alternately to distinguish each set of copies.
Copy
If the finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled or punched, and then
output.
The output destination is automatically selected depending on the selected feature.
4 Documents are delivered on the output tray when [Auto] is selected, or on the finisher
tray when [Collated/Stapling/Punching] or [Uncollated] is selected. For the machine
with the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker, when [Folding/Stapling] for [Booklet Creation]
or [Bi-Folding] for [Folding] is selected, documents are delivered on the booklet tray.
1 Select [Copy Output].

2 Select any item.
Auto
Copies are output collated when
auto document feeder, 2 Sided
Book Copy, Covers, [Blank
Separators & Distribution Sets] or
[No Separators + Distribution Sets]
of [Transparency Separators],
Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and [Document 50 sheets] are set.
Collated Stapling/Punching
The machine can output sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.
Uncollated
The machine can output the specified number of copies and sort sheets by page.
Uncollated with Separators

The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts
sheets by page.
116
Output Format
Stapling
Select from 8 staple positions: 1 Staple, Top Left; 2 Staples, Left; 2 Staples, Top; 1
Staple, Top Right; 2 Staples, Right; 1 Staple, Left Center; 1 Staple, Top; and 1 Staple,
Right Center.
You can set the stapling position. The number of pages that can be stapled is 2 to 50
(P paper and J paper). Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper
1 (105 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), coated paper (105 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2), punched paper, tab paper
(105 - 176 g/m2), and custom paper 1 to 5 can be stapled.
• The staple direction appearing on the screen and the direction in which staples are actually
stapled may differ depending on the combination of the document size and orientation in the
following cases:
When placing documents in Head to Top orientation and staples on the top right
When placing documents in Head to Left orientation and staples on the top left
Hole Punching
You can set the position for punching. Choices of positions are 2 Holes/Left, 2 Holes/
Top, 2 Holes/Right, 4 Holes/Left, 4 Holes/Top, and 4 Holes/Right.
Copy
• When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed and the punching feature
is out of order, the documents will be output on the center output tray. Remove the
4
documents output to the center output tray frequently.
Z Fold
The machine folds the output copies in Z fold. Z fold can be applied to B4, A3, 11 x 17".
If you have mixed sized documents, the width (vertical direction) of the paper must be
the same, such as a combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), and a
combination of B5 (portrait) and B4 (landscape). For example, if you have a
combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), the Z fold is only applied to A3.

be configured.
z
Upright Images
z
Sideway Images
117
4 Copy
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)

ID Card Copy allows copying of both sides of an ID or small document onto one sheet
of paper.

corner of the document glass, and
then close the document cover.
Note • When using this feature, place
the document on the
document glass. This feature
does not work when the
document is set in the
document feeder.
• Confirm that the orientation of
the document is correct.
• If information near an edge of
the image is lost, slightly shift the document position on the document glass to prevent
image loss.
For information about the orientation of loaded documents, refer to "Original Orientation
(Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.85).
2
Copy
Select [ID Card Copying].

3 Select any item.
4 Off
The ID Card Copy feature is not executed.
On
The ID Card Copy feature is executed.
118
Job Assembly
Job Assembly
On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure the Build Job and Sample Set
features. The following shows the reference section for features that can be configured
on [Job Assembly].
Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation)...... 119
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ........................................................ 122
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals).............................................................................. 123
Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)
.................................................................................................................................................. 124
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job).............................................. 126

[Copy].
2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab and
then select a feature on the [Job
Assembly] screen that appears.
Copy
4
Build Job
(Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation)
This feature allows you to change and save settings individually for each document
page or stack and then to finally make copies of documents with different settings as
one job.
Important • When using tab stock with [Covers], [Tab Margin Shift], or [Separators] selected, [Output
Orientation] must be set to [Face Down].
1 Select [Build Job].

2 Select [On].
3 Select items as necessary.
Off
Build Job is not applied.
On
Build Job is applied. The feature buttons appear on the screen. The settings for the
entire document are set first.
119
4 Copy
Important • The features set here cannot be changed or cancelled during the operation.
For the features that can be set here, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.120).
Features that can be set in Build Job

For information about the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)" (P.116).
Copy Output
For information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.114).
Booklet Creation
For information about the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.94).
Covers
For information about the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)" (P.97).
Note • Copying cannot be made on covers attached to a build job.
Annotation
For information about the feature, refer to "Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)"
(P.103).
Copy
Separators
For information about the feature, refer to "Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between
Transparencies)" (P.99).
4 Watermarks
For information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background)"
(P.110).
Output Orientation
For information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.114).
[Build Job - Separators] Screen

Separators can be inserted between segments. The number of separator sheets per
segment can be set to from 1 to 99.
Note • The setting can be changed for each segment. Note that the previous setting stays in effect
until you change it.
1 Select any item.

2 Use the numeric keypad or the [ ]
and [ ] buttons to enter the
number of separator sheets to be
inserted.
No Separators
Separators are not inserted.
Blank Separators
A blank separator is inserted.
After selecting this option, place originals and then press the <Start> button to insert
blank separators.
Printed Separator - Side 1
120
Job Assembly
The first page of the original is printed on Side 1 of separator sheets. The second and
subsequent pages are printed on text pages.
When [Multiple-Up] is selected, pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a separator
sheet.
In the case of a copy job consisting of only one page, it is copied on a separator sheet
only.
Printed Separator - Side 2

The first page of the original is printed on Side 2 of separator sheets. The second and
subsequent pages are printed on text pages.
When [Multiple-Up] is selected, pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a separator
sheet.
In the case of a copy job consisting of only one page, it is copied on a separator sheet
only.
Printed Separator - 2 Sided

The first and second pages of the original are printed on Sides 1 and 2 of separator
sheets. The third and subsequent pages are printed on text pages.
When [Multiple-Up] is selected, 2 times pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a
separator sheet.
Copy
In the case of a copy job consisting only two pages, it is copied on a separator sheet
only.
4
Note • When you load a single page original to copy it on Side 1 of separator sheet, and you load
the next job to copy its first page on Side 2 of the same separator sheet, make sure that
[Build Job - Separators, 2 sided] is set to [Off] before starting the next job. If an option other
than [Off] is selected, the machine recognizes the job as a new job with a new separator
setting, thereby makes copy on Sides 1 and 2 of a new separator sheet.
Separators Tray
Select the tray to use.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen"
(P.67).
Separators Quantity
Set the number of sheets inserted as a separator in the range between 1 and 99
sheets. This item is available only when [Blank Separators] is selected.
121
4 Copy
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)

When making multiple sets of copies, you can make a proof set to check the finished
output and then print the remaining copies. You can select to continue or cancel the job
after the confirmation. you can also change the number of copies. The number of sets
to be copied can also be changed. The sample is included in the total number of sets.
Note • When the time period specified for [Auto Clear] elapses after a sample set has been copied,
the display returns to the previous screen. Adjust the setting for [Auto Clear] as required. For
details about [Auto Clear], refer to "Auto Clear" (P.196).
1 Select [Sample Set].

2 Select [On].
Off
No sample set is made.
On
A sample set is made.
Copy
122
Job Assembly
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)

This feature allows you to copy sheets of documents that cannot be loaded into the
document feeder at one time. This feature also enables to copy multiple documents as
one job by the document glass.
[Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document
feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to
scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If the [Finishing] is
set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.
When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Note • When the time period specified for [Auto Clear] elapses after a set has been copied, the
display returns to the previous screen. Adjust the setting for [Auto Clear] as required. For
details about [Auto Clear], refer to "Auto Clear" (P.196).
1 Select [Combine Original Sets].

2 Select [On].
Copy
4
Off
In the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with
specifying Collated, [Last Original] is selected.
On
In the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with
specifying Collated, [Next Original] is selected.
Original Orientation
Refer to "Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.91).
123
4 Copy
Delete Outside/Delete Inside

(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)
Specify an area to delete everything outside or inside of when copying. Up to 3 areas
can be specified.
1 Select [Delete Outside/Delete

Inside].
2 Select any item.
Off
Turn off [Delete Outside/Delete
Inside].
Delete Outside
Delete outside of the selected area when copying.
Copy
Delete Inside
Delete inside of the selected area when copying.
4 Area Settings
The [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen is displayed. Select up to 3 areas,
from [Area 1] to [Area 3].
Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen" (P.125).
Target areas of originals

For 2 sided documents, specify the side of the area you want to delete outside of or
inside of.
z Both Sides
The setting is applied to both sides of the document.
z Side 1 Only
The setting is applied to only to Side 1 of the document.
z
Side 2 Only
The setting is applied to only to Side 2 of the document.
124
Job Assembly

be configured.
z Upright Images
z Sideway Images
[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen

Set the area to delete outside of or inside of. The quadrangle with a diagonal line and
4 straight sides connecting the coordinates, X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 is deleted or extracted
area. By making the top right comer of a document into the starting point, the X-axis is
set as the direction of width, and the Y-axis is set as the direction of length.
Copy
You can specify a value of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1mm
increments.
Note • Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.
• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other. 4
• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.
1 Select [Area X].

Note • X represents the number of
the area displayed.
2 Enter the value for X1 in [X1] using
the numeric keypad, and select
[Next].
3 Enter the value for Y1 in [Y1] using
the numeric keypad, and select
[Next].
4 Enter the value for the X2 in [X2]
using the numeric keypad, and
select [Next].
5 Enter the value for the Y2 in [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
Note • To change the coordinates you have entered, select [Next], move , and enter the value
again.
• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is
specified, the delete outside/inside function cannot be used.
Clear Area X
Clear the specified areas.
Note • X represents the number of the area displayed.
Next
The mark moves to the next coordinate.
125
4 Copy
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)

It is possible to call a stored program registered for a build job.
This feature is the same as the one described in "Calling Stored Programs" in "6.
Stored Programming". For more information, refer to "Calling Stored Programs"
(P.156).
Copy
126
5 Scan
This chapter describes the scan features provided by this product.

The network settings of the machine must be configured in order to use the scan
features.
z Scanning Procedure .................................................................................128

z
Stopping the Scan Job..............................................................................134
z General Settings .......................................................................................135
z
Image Quality............................................................................................138
z Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................141
z Output Format...........................................................................................147
5 Scan
Scanning Procedure
This section describes basic scan procedures. The following shows the reference
section for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................128
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................130
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................132
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ....................................................................133
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................133
Step 1 Loading Documents

There are two methods for loading documents:
Document feeder
z Single sheet
z Multiple sheets
Document glass
z Single sheet
Bound documents, such as books
Scan
Document Feeder
5 The document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with
sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432
mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Number of
Document type (weight)
sheets
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250
Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250
Heavyweight paper 150
(81 - 128 g/m2)
Heavyweight paper 100
(129 - 200 g/m2)
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-
standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.
For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)"
(P.143).
For information about scanning documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.144).
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the
document feeder.
• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper documents (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.
128
Scanning Procedure
1 Remove any paper clips and

staples before loading the
documents.
2 Adjust the movable document
guides to match the size of the
document loaded.
Note • When loading a large
document such as A3, pick up
the document feeder tray and
open the document stopper
rightward.
3 Place the document face up (the
face of 2 sided document up) in the
center of the document feeder.
Note • The <Confirmation> indicator
lights up when the document
is loaded correctly.
When loading the document in the
document feeder, you can set timing for
lifting up the document feeder tray. For
more information, refer to "Document
Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.223).
Document Glass
Scan
On the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar
documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-
standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field. 5
For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)"
(P.143).

corner of the document glass.
3 Close the document cover.
Note • When a standard size
document is placed on the
document glass, the size of
the document is displayed in
the message area.
129
5 Scan
Step 2 Selecting Features

Scans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions,
information about the transfer destination server and other information.
Job templates are created on a computer using the Webtools. Scanned data is
converted to PDF,TIFF or JPEG format via Network Controller. The machine
automatically receives the job template created by the WebTools.
For information about the WebTools, refer to "Utilities" contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for
the Network Controller.

<All Services>
button
@ @
2 Select [Network Scanning].

Scan
5
3 Specify a job template.
Note • If a created job template is not
displayed, select [Refresh].
Job Template
Select a job template that is
configured with the scan
parameters you want. Select [ ] to
return to the previous screen or [ ]
to move to the next screen.
Go to
Entering a job template number
with the numeric keypad causes
that job template to appear at the top of the list.
Template Description
You can display a description of the job template.
4 Select the features to set from each tab as necessary.

For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections.
"General Settings" (P.135)
130
Scanning Procedure
"Image Quality" (P.138)

"Layout Adjustment" (P.141)
"Output Format" (P.147)
Template Description
You can display a description of the job template. However, a description only appears
if it has been set when the job template was created.
1 Select the job template, and select

[Template Description].
Scan
5
131
5 Scan
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job

Important • If the document has been set
in the document feeder, do not
press the document while it is
being conveyed.
Note • If a problem occurs, an error
@ @
message appears in the touch
screen. Solve the problem in <Start> button
accordance with the message.
• The following job
configurations can be performed while scanning.
If You Have More Documents

If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan several documents as one
set of data.
Up to 999 pages can be stored.
Note • If the number of document pages exceeds this maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the
displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned document data.
2 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].
Note • When the screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time,
the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.
Scan
• When using the document feeder, set the next documents after the first documents are all
scanned.
5
• You can change the scan settings for the next document by selecting [Change Scan
Settings] displayed after selecting the [Next Original].
3 Load the next document.
4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and
press the <Start> button.
5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
132
Scanning Procedure
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status
<Job Status>
button
2 Confirm the job status.

[ ] to display the next
screen.
Scan
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data
The document stored in a mailbox of the machine is imported into your computer by
using Filery Webscan.
5
For more information, refer to "Utilities" contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network
Controller.
133
5 Scan
Stopping the Scan Job
Follow the procedure below to cancel a scan.

Control Panel.
<Stop> button
@ @
2 Select [Stop].
3 If the screen in Step 1 does not
appear, press the <Job Status>
button. <Job Status>
button
Scan
4 Select the job to cancel, and then
5
select [Stop].
Note • When a scan is cancelled,
scan data already stored in a
mailbox is deleted.
134
General Settings
General Settings
The Basic Scan screen allows you to configure basic features. For more information,
refer to below.
Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan) ......................................................................... 135
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 136
Original Type (Select the Document Type) ............................................................................. 137
Note • [Scanning Color] and [Output Format] in the job template cannot be changed.

[Network Scanning].
2 Select the [General Settings] tab.
Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)
Scan
You can only confirm the Scanning
color of the Job Template for the
documents to be scanned. 5
Auto Detect
The color of the document is
determined automatically; the
machine scans in full color when
the document is colored, otherwise
scans in monochrome.
Color
Choose to scan a color document.
Grayscale
Scan a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate
tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be
reproduced with monochrome (2-color).
Black
Scan a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the
[Original Type].
135
5 Scan
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)

You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document.
When setting the binding style, front / back information can also be included in the
scanned data.
1 Select any item.
1 Sided
Select to scan only 1 side of the
document.
2 Sided (Head to Head)

Select when both sides of a 2 sided
document are in the same
orientation.
2 Sided (Head to Toe)

Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite orientations.
More...
Scan
The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[2 Sided Originals] Screen" (P.136).
5 [2 Sided Originals] Screen
Select when you want to specify the document's orientation and scan both sides.
1 Select either [1 Sided] or [2 Sided].

2 When [2 Sided] is selected, select
[Originals].
Originals
Displayed when [2 Sided] is
selected in the Originals screen.
z Head to Head
Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same orientation.
z
Head to Toe
Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite orientations.
136
General Settings
To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to indicate the top of
the document.
z Upright Images
Select when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document
glass or the document feeder.
z Sideways Images
Select when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document
glass or the document feeder. Be sure to select [Head to Left] when the top of the
document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).
Original Type (Select the Document Type)

When scanning a document with [Scanning Color] set to [Black] in the [General
Settings] screen, select the document type.
1 Select [Original Type].
Scan
Photo & Text
Select when scanning documents
containing both text and photos.
This setting automatically scans 5
text and photo areas with the
optimum document quality per
area.
Text
Select when scanning text clearly.
Photo
Select when scanning photos.
137
5 Scan
Image Quality
In the [Image Quality] screen under [Network Scanning], you can configure the image
quality features. For more information, refer to below.
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)............................................................................138
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast) ............................................................138
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting contrast) .......139
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)..............................................140
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) .....................................................................................140
1 Select the [Image Quality] tab, and

configure each feature.
Note • [Color Space] is not available
for some models. An optional
package is necessary. For
more information, contact our
Customer Support Center. A
setting must be made in the
System Administration mode
to activate [Color Space]. For
more information, refer to
"Shadow Suppression Level"
(P.245).
Scan
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)
5 Configure when scanning a color photograph.

This feature is only available when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] in the [General
Settings] screen.
Important • This feature is not supported by a document feeder.
1 Select [Photographs].
2 Select [Enhance Photographs].
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)

You can set the scan density for the documents to be scanned.
In addition, when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the [General
Settings] screen, you can also adjust contrast.
138
Image Quality
1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].
Lighten/Darken
You can select from among 7
density levels between [Lighter] and
[Darker].
Scan density is darker the closer
you get to [Darker], and lighter the
closer you get to [Lighter].
Sharpness
You can select from 5 sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen]. The nearer
the level is to [Sharpen], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer the level is to
[Soften], the softer the contours of images.
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/

Adjusting contrast)
The background color of a document such as newspaper and colored paper can be
erased. In addition, when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the
Scan
[General Settings] screen, you can also adjust contrast.
1
2
Select [Image Enhancement].
Select [Background Suppression]
5
and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with
[ ] and [ ].
z No Suppression
Document backgrounds are
scanned with no filtering.
z Auto Suppression
When a document is scanned with [Black] of [Scanning Color], the background color
of documents such as newspaper and colored paper documents is erased. When
[Scanning Color] is set to [Color], white backgrounds are suppressed.
Contrast
You can select from 5 contrast levels between [Less Contrast] and [More Contrast].
The nearer the level is to [More Contrast], the greater the difference between light parts
and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. [Less
Contrast] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark areas.
139
5 Scan
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)

When scanning a 2 sided document printed on thin paper, you can suppress the image
on the reverse side.
Only enabled when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the [General
Settings] screen.
Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].
1 Select [Shadow Suppression].

2 Select [Auto Suppression].
Color Space (Specifying Color Space)

You can specify color space for scans.
Scan
Important • Color Space is available when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color].

Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
5 information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System
Administration mode to display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. For more
information, refer to "Original Orientation" (P.242).
1 Select [Color Space].

2 Select either [Standard Color
Space] or [Device Color Space].
Standard Color Space

Color space for scanned data
conforms to sYCC.
Device Color Space

Use to perform advanced color
processing.
Note • You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.
• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are
changed to their defaults.
Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression
• When [Scanning Color] is set to [Auto Detect], [Standard Color Space] is applied to color
pages of the documents.
140
Layout Adjustment
Layout Adjustment
In the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network

Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the scan options. For more
information, refer to below.
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution).............................................................. 141
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 136
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................................. 142
Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)............................................................................. 143
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................ 144
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) ...................................... 145
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio) ....................................................................... 146
1 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab,

and configure each feature.
Scan
5
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)
You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.
As the resolution increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also
increases. As the data size increases, scan and transfer times increase as well.
1 Select [Scan Resolution].

2 Select a resolution.
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)

This feature is the same as [2 Sided Originals] in the [General Settings] tab.
For information, refer to "2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.136).
141
5 Scan
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)

The Book Scanning feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto
separate sheets of paper in page order.
This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans from facing pages of bound
originals such as a booklet.
Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1 Select [Book Scanning].

2 Select any item.
Off
The document is not scanned as a
bound document.

Scans from the left page of facing
pages in a document starting from
the left page.
Scan

Scans from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.
5 Top Page then Bottom

Scans from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.
Both Pages
Scans both pages in page order.
Left Page Only

Scans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right Page Only

Scans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Top Page Only

Scans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then
Bottom] is selected.
Bottom Page Only

Scans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page
then Bottom] is selected.
Binding Erase
142
Layout Adjustment
Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)

You can set the scan size for the document.
Specify the scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making
scans at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document.
When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the
size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to scan the document with adding
or deleting the margin.
1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select a size.
Auto Size Detect

Scan sizes are detected automatically. The machine can detect the following document
sizes.
Scan
Document feeder Document glass
Document size B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4,

A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches,
B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6,
A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x
5
8.5 x 11 inches , 11 x 17 11 inches , 16K, 16K , 8K
inches, 16K , 8K
Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size
appears.
• You can change document sizes that can be detected automatically on the [Paper Size
Standard Size
Select a document size from a list of 17 pre-configured types.
Free Size
Enter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when
making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the
size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and
in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The
scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the
document size.
143
5 Scan
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents

Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size
documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can
also specify the size of the paper so that scanning is made on the same size of paper.
Important • When selecting [Color] for [Scanning Color], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Originals], set the
[Scan Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].
• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.
• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place
the B5 document also in a vertical direction.
• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5
portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our
recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.
• When setting the [Reduce/Enlarge] to [Auto %] and specifying an [Output Size], the scan is
performed with automatic reduce/enlarge to the specified size.
• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size
appears.
1 Select [Mixed Size Originals].

2 Select [On].
Scan
Off
Select this item when all documents
5 are of the same size.
On
When scanning documents of
different sizes, the machine
automatically detects the size of
each document.
144
Layout Adjustment
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)

When you scan the document cover open or scan a book, black shadows sometimes
appear along the edges or center margin of the output scanned image. If this happens,
you can scan with the shadows erased.
Note • When making 2 sided scans, the same border erase amount is set to the top and reverse
sides.
• When selecting [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in
proportion to the ratio you configured.

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to
erase for each of the top and
bottom, left and right, and center.
Normal
The border erase amount is set to 2
mm for the top, bottom, left and right.
Scan
If you do not want to erase edges, set each [Edge Erase] value to 0 mm.
Edge Erase
You can erase only the amount necessary. 5
z Top & Bottom Edges
Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and
bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded.
The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z Left & Right Edges
Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right
are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. The edge
erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z Center
Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing
pages are erased. The binding erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm
in 1 mm increments.
be configured.
For more information, refer to "Original Orientation" (P.137).
145
5 Scan
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)

You can set the scanning ratio for the documents to be scanned.
1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
2 Select the scanning ratio.
Proportional %
z
100%
Scan is made at the same size as the document.
z Preset %
Select from among 12 preset ratios.
You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets"
(P.244).
Scan
z Variable %
5 You can scan by selecting a variable ratio. The ratio can be set within the range
25 - 400% in 1% increments.
Auto %
Automatically sets the scanning ratio based on the document size and specified
[Output Size].
Note • White space after scanning with [Auto %] is blank data.
146
Output Format
Output Format
In the [Output Format] screen, you can configure the output formats. For more
information, refer to below.
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) ............................................. 147
1 Select the [Output Format] tab.

Note • Fields displayed vary
depending on the selected
feature.
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio)

When scanning a document from the [General Settings] screen with [Scanning Color]
set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale], select the image compression ratio.
Scan
1 Select [Image Compression].
2 You can select from among 5
levels of compression, including 5
the 3 below.
Higher
Image is saved with high
compression. Image quality
degrades, but file size decreases.
Normal
Image is saved with standard compression. Results in a standard image quality and file
size.
Lower
Image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but file size increases.
147
This chapter describes the Stored Programming features provided by the

machine.
z Stored Programming Overview.................................................................150
z Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................151
z Calling Stored Programs...........................................................................156
Stored Programming Overview
Frequently used features can be registered as Stored Programming and recalled by a

single button operation. In addition, you can also register a screen to open from a
shortcut button.
Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings, but also can record a series
of operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each
step.
For example, Stored Programming can be used when you want to record a procedure
starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job]
screen to print a job history report.
The following shows the reference sections for registering and recalling stored
programs.
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ....................................................................151
Calling Stored Programs ...........................................................................................................156
Stored Programming
150
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to set the following items:
Registering Stored Programs.................................................................................................... 152
Registering Stored Program (Build Job) .................................................................................. 153
Deleting Stored Programs ........................................................................................................ 154
Entering/Changing Stored Program Name............................................................................... 154
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ...................................................................... 155

2 Select [Setup Menu].
Stored Programming
3 Select [Stored Programming].
151
Registering Stored Programs

Up to 58 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs
can be registered in the machine.
The following describes the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.
Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system
settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also
changes.
Note • Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book
cannot be registered.
• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is
pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.)
appears.
1 Select [Store].
2 Select the number to register.
Note • Once a job is stored to a
button, it cannot be
overwritten.
• Select [ ] to return to the
Stored Programming
3 Set the feature you want to

register.
Note • The machine produces an
audible tone while a stored
memory is registered.
4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.
6 You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For more
information, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.199).
152
Registering Stored Program (Build Job)

Stored program for Build Job can record up to 40 features. In addition, up to 100 actions
can be registered with a stored program.
The following describes the procedure for registering actions with a stored program.
Important • A stored program, which is registered, may not be called out correctly if following operations
are launched after the stored program registration.
• When changing default settings for Watermark feature after a stored program is registered
as the Watermark feature is registered to the stored program.
• When features registered to the stored program does not work after default values are
changed by system settings.
• When the Passcode for the object of mailbox operation differs from the time of the stored
program registration at the stored program operating mailbox.
• When registering the paper size and paper quality of bypass to the selecting the stored
program, register both the size and quality. Only registering the paper size or paper quality
may not call for the stored program correctly.
• If launching the following operations while a stored program is being registered, registering a
stored program and the stored program performance are not working well.
• Removing and setting a paper tray.
• Loading paper into bypass.
• Removing paper loaded in bypass.
Note • If the <Interrupt> button is pressed, if the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or if a popup
Stored Programming
window (paper jam, etc.) appears, then the stored program record operation is cancelled.
1 Select [Store Build Job].

2 Select the number to register.
Note • Once a job is stored to a
button, it cannot be
overwritten.
• Select [ ] to display the
[ ] to display the next screen. 6
3 Set the feature you want to
register.
Note • A tone is generated while
registering to job memory.
4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration.
Refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.199) for configuration procedure.
153
Deleting Stored Programs

The following describes the procedure for deleting stored programs.
1 Select [Delete].
2 Select the number to delete.
3 Select [Yes].
Yes
Stored Programming
Deletes a stored program.

Note • Deleted stored programs
cannot be restored.
No
Cancels deleting a stored program.
6 Entering/Changing Stored Program Name

The following describes the procedure for entering or changing a name of a stored
program.
Up to 18 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.193).
1 Select [Enter/Change Name].

2 Select the number to register or
change a name.
154
3 Enter a name, and select [Save]
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs

The following describes the procedure for assigning or changing a icon of a stored
program.
Nine icons are available.
1 Select [Assign/Change Icon].
Stored Programming
2 Select the number to assign or
change a icon.
6
3 Select a icon, and select [Save].
155
Calling Stored Programs
This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.

When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered
the stored programming appears.

<All Services>
button
@ @
2 Display the next screen, and select

[Stored Programming].
Stored Programming
3 Select the number of a stored

6 program containing the features
you want to use.
Note • You can only select registered
numbers.
4 After the stored program is called,

select other features if necessary.
5 Press the <Start> button if
necessary.
@ @
<Start> button
156
This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine,
precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
z Paper Types .............................................................................................158
z Loading Paper ..........................................................................................162
z Changing the Paper Size for the Trays.....................................................173
z Changing Paper Settings..........................................................................179
Paper Types
This section describes the kinds of paper available for this device.
Use of inappropriate paper may result in paper jams, cause reduced print quality,
malfunctions and other trouble. To make full and effect use of the machine's
performance, we recommend using only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
If you want to use paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Important • The printed image may fade due to moisture such as water, rain or vapor. For more
WARNING
Do not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When paper
jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
Supported Paper Weight and Quantity
Plain Paper (Printable Paper)

When using supplier paper (known as printable paper) for copying or printing, make
sure that it complies with the following specifications. However, it is recommended that
Paper and Other Media
you use the standard paper types introduced on the next page, to achieve clear copy
and print results.
Loadable
Paper tray Weight Paper type
quantity
Paper tray 1 to 2 64 to 176 g/m2 560 sheets Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2
paper, transparencies, heavyweight
Tray 3 980 sheets
paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), punched
Tray 4 1,280 sheets paper
7 Tray 5
(bypass)
64 to 280 g/m 2
Up to 27mm 250
sheets
Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2
paper, transparencies, heavyweight
paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2),
heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), coated paper 1 (106 - 176 g/
m2), coated paper 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2),
heavyweight paper 2 (side 2),
coated paper 1 (side 2), coated
paper 2 (side 2), Labels 1 (106 -
176 g/m2), Labels 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), tack film, punched paper, tab
paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), tab paper
2 (177 - 280 g/m2)
158
Paper Types
Loadable
Paper tray Weight Paper type
quantity
Tray 6 64 to 176 g/m2 2,300 sheets Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2
(high capacity) paper, heavyweight paper 1 (106 -
(optional) 176 g/m2), punched paper
Tray 6 64 to 280 g/m2 Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2
(A3+ high paper, transparencies, heavyweight
capacity) paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2),
(optional) heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), coated paper 1 (106 - 176 g/
m2), coated paper 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2),
heavyweight paper 2 (side 2),
coated paper 1 (side 2), coated
paper 2 (side 2), Labels 1 (106 -
176 g/m2), Labels 2 (177 - 280 g/
m2), tack film, punched paper, tab
paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), tab paper
2 (177 - 280 g/m2)
Important • Printing with paper whose type or size differs from the paper specified by the print driver, or
printing from a tray not supporting the loaded paper can result in paper jams. To ensure
correct printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.
Note • Basic weight means a weight of 1 m2 of a paper sheet.
• Ream weight means weight of 1,000 sheets of paper in duodecimo size (788 x 1,091mm).

• When copying with a non-standard paper size from Tray 5 (bypass), you must manually
enter the paper size. In addition, if you use a non-standard paper size often, you can preset
the size in the device. Then the preset size appears under [Standard Sizes] in the [Tray 5
(Bypass)] screen. For more information, refer to "Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults"
(P.208).
• Image quality best suited to the paper type can be obtained by setting the desired image
processing to particular paper types.
159
Standard
Recommended paper
Paper GSM
FX P Paper 64 g/m2
Colotech+ 90 g/m2
FX J Paper 80 g/m2
FX JD Paper 98 g/m2
FXK-H (H803, H804) 75 g/m2
AG KXPI Blue (A3) 80 g/m2
Paper Q 80 g/m2
Premier (3R91720) 80 g/m2
No.1 (Xerox Brand) 80 g/m2
No.2 (Package Green) 80 g/m2
Purple Wrap (212A00297) 80 g/m2
Business (3R91820) 80 g/m2
Usable paper
Paper stock that can be used
GSM (Unit g/m2)

Paper
and Paper type
Indagiat (K704 A4) 75 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
Paper N 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
Performer (3R90649) 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
AG KXPI Red 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
7 No. GA (Package: Green)

No. ZA (Package: Orange)
80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
70 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
White & Red Label (=P70) 70 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
Performer White A3 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)
Special Media
Copy or print can be made on the following paper by using tray 5 (bypass). This type
of paper is called Special Media. The type of the special media that can be used is as
follows.
Paper Paper Type

Labels 3R97408 Label 1 (106 - 176 g/m2)
Note • For more information about other heavyweight or special media, contact our Customer
Support Center.
160
Paper Types
Storing and Handling Paper
Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper

z Store paper inside a cabinet or in other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture
can cause paper jams and image quality defects.
z
After opening a package of paper, wrap up the remaining paper to store it. It is
recommended that you include moisture prevention packets.
z Paper should be stored flat to prevent bends or warping.
Please adhere to the following when setting paper into the tray
z
Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in the tray.
z
Do not use paper that is folded, creased, or heavily warped.
z
Do not use waved or curled paper.
z
Do not load paper of mixed size together into the tray.
z Transparency paper and label paper can cause paper jams, and multiple sheets can
be fed to the printer at once. Be sure to carefully fan these types of paper.
z
When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets may
sometimes stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20
or so sheets, and fan them to cool them down.

7
161
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper.
Types of paper loaded in trays

The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in trays.
You need to set a paper type, however. Normally, each of the trays is set to plain paper.
When loading paper other than plain paper in trays, change the paper type setting.
Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper can also be named and set as user-
defined paper. Up to five paper types can be set as user-defined paper.
For information about changing the paper type in trays, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays"
(P.173).
Automatic Tray Selection

If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print
driver's properties screen when making prints, the machine automatically selects the
corresponding paper tray according to the size and orientation of the document to print.
This is called [Automatic Tray Selection].
When making copies, automatic tray selection is active if [Auto] is selected for [Paper
Select]. If the machine judges that there are two or more corresponding trays in
automatic tray selection, the machine gives higher priority to the tray having the highest
[Paper Type Priority] set at [Tray Paper Type]. During automatic tray selection, trays
whose [Paper Type Priority] setting is set to [Off] are not targeted in [Automatic Tray
Selection]. Also, if the [Paper Priority] setting is exactly the same, automatic tray
selection is determined by [Tray Priority].

Note • Depending on the setting of [Auto Paper by Output Color] for the paper tray, [Automatic Tray
Selection] may not be applied to the tray. For [Auto Paper by Output Color], refer to "Auto
Paper Select" (P.205)
Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed
on the control panel. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or
Printing is automatically resumed when paper is added.
7
Note • Fan the paper well before loading paper in a tray. It prevents paper from adhering to each
other and reduces paper jams.
• Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected in the automatic tray selection.
• When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select the tray containing the
paper of the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and
continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switch feature). During this operation, a tray
containing paper of type whose [Paper Priority] setting is set to [Off] cannot be switched to.
For information about setting [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], [Paper Tray Priority], and setting the
paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.203).
162
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Trays 1 to 2.
on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or
printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.
Note • Before loading paper in a tray, fan the paper well. It prevents paper from adhering to each
other and reduces paper jams.
For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the
Trays" (P.173).
1 Pull out the tray towards you until it

stops.
Important • While the machine processes
a job, do not pull the tray out
that the job uses.
• Do not add new paper to the
paper on the tray in order to
prevent paper jams or making
mistakes of paper loading.
Remove any paper remaining
in the tray and then load the paper on newly loaded paper.
2 Load and align the edge of the

paper against the left edge of the

tray with the side to be copied or
printed on face down.
Important • Do not load paper exceeding
the maximum fill line (MAX in
the figure to the right). It may
cause paper jams or machine
malfunctions.
• Do not place any paper or
things in the empty space on
the right side of the Tray 1 or 2.
It may cause paper jams or
machine malfunctions. 7
3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.
163
Loading Paper in the Tray 3

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 3.
Trays" (P.173).

stops.
that the job uses.


malfunctions.
164
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Tray 4

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 4.
Trays" (P.173).

stops.
that the job uses.


malfunctions.
165
Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

When printing or copying with paper sizes or types that cannot be set in the Trays 1 to
4 and 6, use the Tray 5 (bypass).
The following describes how to load paper into the Tray 5 (bypass).
To make detailed instructions during printings, specify the instructions using the [Tray/
Output] tab in the print driver. When doing this, also specify the type of paper to load.
Important • Do not supply new paper until the loaded paper runs out in order to prevent paper jams or
making mistakes of paper loading.
Note • Be sure to fan the paper well. Otherwise, paper may cause paper jams, and multiple sheets
may be fed to the printer at once.
1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) as

necessary.
Note • If necessary, extend the
extension flap. The extension
flap can be extended in two
stages. When pulling out the
extension flap, do it gently.
2 Hold the center of the paper guides

and slide them to the desired paper
size.
3 Load paper with the side to be

copied or printed on facing up, and
insert the paper lightly along the
7 paper guide until it comes to a stop.
Important • Do not load mixed paper types
into the tray.
• Do not load paper exceeding
malfunctions.
4 When loading a non-standard paper size on the Tray 5 (bypass), move the paper
guides to accommodate the paper.
166
Loading Paper
Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the Tray 5.
Important • Tab paper can be loaded on the Tray 5 (Bypass) and Tray 6 (A3+ Higy Capacity) only.
• Tab paper can be used only with [Tab Margin Shift] and [Covers/Separators].
1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass).

Note • If necessary, extend the
extension flap. The extension
flap can be extended in two
stages. When pulling out the
extension flap, do it gently.

size.

3 Load paper with the side to be
copied or printed on facing up and
the top edge frontward, and insert
the paper lightly along the paper
guide until it comes to a stop.
Important • Do not load mixed paper types
into the tray.
• Do not load paper exceeding 7
the figure). It may cause paper
jams or machine malfunctions.
167
Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the optional Tray 6.
Trays" (P.173).

stops.
that the job uses.

paper against the right edge of the

printed on facing up.
the maximum fill line. It may
malfunctions.

7
168
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the optional Tray 6 (A3+
High Capacity).
Trays" (P.173).

stops.
that the job uses.

malfunctions.
3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop. 7
169
Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the optional Tray 6 (A3+
High Capacity).
Important • Tab paper can be loaded on the Tray 5 (Bypass) and Tray 6 (A3+ Higy Capacity) only.
• Tab paper can be used only for [Tab Margin Shift], and [Covers/Separators].

stops.
that the job uses.


malfunctions.
Note • When loading tab paper, make
sure the drilled side toward the
right.

7
170
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).
Interposer is meant for loading paper (blank, copied paper, etc.) to be used as
separators and covers, so it cannot copy.
Note • When adding paper to interposer, remove any paper remaining in the tray, add it to the stack
of paper to be added, then load all of the paper into the interposer at once.

size.
2 Load the paper, aligning to the front

side of the tray.
the maximum fill line. It might
malfunctions.

Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)
The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).

size.
7
2 If the paper in already printed on,

load the paper with the printed side
facing up and with the tab side to be
A
fed first.
A
the maximum fill line. It might

malfunctions.
171
Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Tray 6 (A3+ High

Capacity)
The following describes how to make it easier to feed heavyweight paper loaded in the
Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).
Use the weight switch button to adjust the air assist level. This helps the paper to be
fed smoothly. For the paper heavier than 256 g/m2, slide the switch button to the
heavier weight group.
Important • If 256 g/m2 or heavier paper is loaded in the tray, be sure to switch the button to the heavier
weight group. Otherwise, paper jams or malfunctions may occur.

stops.
that the job uses.
2 Switch both buttons to the

appropriate weight group.
172
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays
The following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 4 and 6.
Note • The paper types for the Trays 1 to 4 and 6 are preset. Normally, plain paper is set. When
changing the setting to a different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the
type of paper to be loaded to maintain high print quality.
For more information about paper type, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).
• Non-standard paper can be loaded in the Trays 1 and 2. When setting a non-standard
paper, you must register the paper size in advance. For information about assigning
features, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).
For information about paper size, "Main Unit and Copier Specifications" (P.394)
For a description of how to make copies on non-standard size paper, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting
the Paper for Copying)" (P.66). For information on how to print to non-standard size paper, refer to the
print driver's online help.
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2

The following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 2.

stops.

that the job uses.
2 Remove any paper loaded on the tray.

3 Hold the long-side paper guide and
slide it until it comes to a stop (1).
2
7
Hold the short-side paper guide on
the right side and slide it until it
comes to a stop (2).
1
173

malfunctions.
• Do not place any paper or
things in the empty space on
the right side of the Tray 1 or 2.
It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.
5 Move the long-side and short-side

paper guides while holding their
grips so that they lightly contact the
edges of the paper.
6 Push the tray in gently until it comes
to a stop.
Note • Affix the paper size label to the
front of the paper tray.
7 If you have changed the paper type,
you need to change the tray settings.
For information on setting paper type, refer to "Changing Paper Settings" (P.179).
Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3

The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 3.

stops.
7 Important • While the machine processes

that the job uses.

3 Hold the paper guide and slide it
until it comes to a stop.
174

malfunctions.
5 Hold the paper guide and move it to

gently touch the edge of the paper.
7 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings.
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 4

The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 4.

stops.

that the job uses.
3 Hold the paper guide and slide it
until it comes to a stop. 7

malfunctions.
5 Hold the paper guide and move it to gently touch the edge of the paper.
175

7 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings.
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity)

The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity).

stops.
that the job uses.

3 Open the end guide (1) and
unscrew the screw (2). Then

remove the guide from the Tray.
4 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the
7 paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top
of the guide and screw up (2).
176
5 Unscrew the screw of the front

guide and remove the guide from
the Tray.
6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the
paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top
of the guide and screw up (2).

7 Pull the lever up of the end guide
1
and move it along the slot (1). Set
the lever at the position
3
corresponding to the paper size (2)
and press the lever down (3).
2
Note • Set the guide to gently touch
the edge of the paper. If the
position of the guide is not
7
correct, the paper may not be
fed properly and cause paper
jams.
Note • The slot on the left of 8.5 is not used.
8 Open the end guide and load and

align the edge of the paper against
the right edge of the tray with the
side to be copied or printed on
facing up.
Note • Do not load paper exceeding
the maximum fill line or the
maximum capacity of the tray.
177
9 Close the end guide tightly.
10 Push the tray in gently until it comes

to a stop.
Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)
The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High
Capacity).

stops.
that the job uses.

3 Hold the long-side paper guide and
slide it until it comes to a stop (1).
Hold the short-side paper guide on
the left side and slide it until it
comes to a stop (2).
7
4 With the side to be copied or
printed on facing up, load and align
the edges of the paper in the arrow
direction.
malfunctions.
5 Slide the long-side and short-side paper guides to just touch the edges of the paper
stack.
Note • Position the guides correctly to match the paper size. If the position of the guide is not
correct, the paper may not be fed properly and cause paper jams.
178
Changing Paper Settings
The following describes how to change the paper type on trays and how to set image
quality processing by individual paper type.
After loading paper, change tray settings including paper type and image quality
processing for the paper type. Image quality best suited to the paper type can be
obtained by setting the desired image processing to particular paper types. For
information on image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Original
Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.73).
Note • Users can name custom paper 1 to 5 displayed in the paper type.
For information about how to set names to custom paper 1 to 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name" (P.203).
For information about image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Image Quality"
(P.209).
<Log In/Out>
button

2 Enter the system administrator
UserID with the numeric keypad or
a keyboard displayed by pressing
[Keyboard], and select [Confirm].
admin”.
7
179

6 Select [Paper Tray Settings].
7 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].
180
8 Select the paper tray whose paper

type setting is to be changed at
[Items], and select [Change
Settings].
9 Select [Change Settings].

10 Select the paper type and paper
size to change, and select [Save].
11 Make sure that [Paper Type] you

changed is the newly entered
value, and select [Confirm]. 7
12 Select [Close].
13 Select [Image Quality].
14 Select the paper type whose image

processing is to be changed at
[Items], and select [Change
Settings].
15 Select the image processing value

to change, and select [Save].
181
16 Make sure that the [Current Settings] at the [Items] you changed is the newly entered
value, and select [Close].
182
8 System Settings
The machine has factory default (initial) settings, but you can customize the
system settings. To change the settings, enter System Administration mode,
and use the [System Settings] screen.
This chapter contains information for System Administrators on the features
used to change the settings and on the setting procedures.
z
System Settings Procedure ......................................................................184
z System Settings Menu List .......................................................................187
z Entering Text ............................................................................................193
z Common Settings .....................................................................................194
z Copy Mode Settings .................................................................................224
z
Scan Mode Settings..................................................................................240
z Network Controller Settings ......................................................................247
z
System Administrator Settings..................................................................249
z Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................252
8 System Settings
System Settings Procedure
To make or change the system settings, it is necessary to be in the System

Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows
the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .........................................................................184
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode ............................................184
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ..........................185
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen....................................................185
Step 5 Setting the Feature .........................................................................................................186
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................186
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
<Log In/Out>
button
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode

System Settings
To enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you
are using the authentication feature, a Passcode may be required.
It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and Passcode immediately after installing
the machine. For more information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.249).

8 keypad or a keyboard displayed by
[Confirm].
admin”.
184
System Settings Procedure
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator

Menu
User Mode
While still in the System
Administration mode, you can carry
out normal operations such as
copying and scanning.
Note • To exit a mode entered from
[User Mode], use the following
procedure.
(1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
(2) In the [Log In] screen, select [Cancel].
System Settings
You can set or register the system settings.
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen

In the [System Settings] screen, select an item to be set.
For the items that can be selected in the system settings, refer to "System Settings Menu List" (P.187).
1 Select the item to be set.
System Settings
8
System Settings
You can set or change the default values.
Common Settings
These settings relate to the machine itself.
For information, refer to "Common Settings" (P.194).
Copy Mode Settings

You can set the copy feature defaults, copy operation control, button indications, and so on.
For information, refer to "Copy Mode Settings" (P.224).
Scan Mode Settings

You can set the scanner feature defaults, button indications, and so on.
For information, refer to "Scan Mode Settings" (P.240).
185
8 System Settings
Network Controller Settings

You can set the IP adress, and so on.
For the items in the Print Settings, refer to "Network Controller Settings" (P.247).
Setup Menu
You can change Paper Tray Attributes.
For information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).
System Administrator Settings

You can set the system administrator ID and system administrator Passcode for
entering System Administration mode.
For information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.249).
Login Setup/Auditron Administration

You can set restrictions on users using feature of the machine, or set restrictions on
individual users.
For information, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration" (P.252).
Step 5 Setting the Feature
1 Set any feature.

2 After setting the feature, select [Save].
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode

System Settings
1 When the settings are completed,

select [Close] until the [System
Settings] screen appears.
2 Select [Exit].
186
System Settings Menu List
The following table shows a list of the items that can be set. Note that the items
appearing depend on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings
Common Settings
Machine Clock/Timers(P.195) z
Date(P.195)
z Time(P.195)
z Auto Clear(P.196)
z
Auto Job Release(P.196)
z
Printer Lockout Duration(P.197)
z
Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver(P.197)
z Time Zone(P.197)
z Daylight Savings(P.198)
Audio Tones (P.198) z Control Panel Select Tone(P.198)
z Control Panel Alert Tone(P.198)
z Base Tone(P.198)
z
Machine Ready Tone(P.198)
z
Copy Job Complete Tone(P.198)
z Non-Copy Job Complete Tone(P.199)
z
Fault Tone(P.199)
z
Auto Clear Alert Tone(P.199)
z
Alert Tone(P.199)
z
Out of Paper Warning Tone(P.199)
z Low Toner Alert Tone(P.199)
z
Stored Programming Tone(P.199)
Screen/Button Settings(P.200) z Screen Default(P.200)
System Settings
z Screen After Auto Clear(P.200)
z Screen After Auto Clear(P.200)
z
Auto Display of Login Screen(P.201)
z Custom Button 1 to 3(P.201)
z All Services(P.201)
z All Services - Additional Features(P.202)
z Job Type on Job Status Screen(P.203)
Paper Tray Settings(P.203) Custom Paper Name(P.203)
8
z
z Paper Tray Attributes(P.203)

Paper Size(P.204)
Paper Type(P.205)
Auto Paper Select(P.205)
z Customize Paper Supply Screen(P.206)
z Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu(P.206)
z Paper Tray Attributes During Loading(P.206)
z
Paper Tray Priority(P.207)
z Paper Type Priority(P.207)
z Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults(P.208)
z Auto Tray Switching(P.209)
z Image Quality(P.209)
187
8 System Settings
Image Quality Adjustment(P.211) z Image Quality(P.211)

Photo & Text Recognition(P.211)
Output Color Recognition(P.211)
Photo Reproduction Level(P.211)
Background Suppression (Color Copy)(P.212)
Background Suppression (B/W Copy)(P.212)
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)(P.212)
z
Image Enhancement(P.212)
z Calibration(P.212)
Reports (P.214) z
Print Report Button(P.214)
z
Job History Report(P.214)
z 2 Sided Report(P.214)
Maintenance (P.215) z Initialize Hard Disk(P.215)
z
Delete All Data(P.216)
z
Software Options(P.216)
z Adjust Image Position(P.216)
Watermark (P.216) z Date Format(P.216)
z
Text Effect Default(P.216)
z
Text Default(P.216)
z
Text Size(P.217)
z Background Pattern(P.217)
z Color(P.217)
z Density(P.217)
z
Text/Background Contrast(P.217)
z Force Watermark - Copy Job(P.217)
z Custom Text 1 to 3(P.217)
Other Settings (P.217) z Auto Job Promotion(P.217)
z Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)(P.218)
z Default Print Paper Size(P.218)
z Paper Size Settings(P.219)
z Millimeters/Inches(P.221)
System Settings
z Keyboard Input Restriction(P.221)

z Operation of Up/Down Buttons(P.221)
z Display Consumables Screen(P.221)
z Overwrite Hard Disk(P.221)
z
Data Encryption(P.222)
z Encryption Key for Confidential Data(P.223)
z Service Rep. Restricted Operation(P.223)
8 Software Download(P.223)
z
z Document Feeder Tray Elevation(P.223)

z
Gloss Level(P.223)
z Estimated Job Time(P.223)
Copy Mode Settings
General Settings Tab - Features -

Allocation (P.225)
Preset Buttons(P.225) -
188
Copy Defaults (P.226) z Paper Supply(P.226)

z
Reduce/Enlarge(P.226)
z
Output Color(P.226)
z Single Color - Color(P.226)
z Dual Color - Source Color(P.226)
z Dual Color - Target Area Color(P.226)
z
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color(P.227)
z
Original Type(P.227)
z Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)(P.227)
z Original Type - Auto (Black)(P.227)
z Lighten/Darken(P.227)
z Contrast(P.227)
z
Sharpness(P.227)
z Saturation(P.227)
z
Background Suppression(P.227)
z
Color Balance - Yellow(P.227)
z Color Balance - Magenta(P.227)
z
Color Balance - Cyan(P.228)
z
Color Balance - Black(P.228)
z Color Shift(P.228)
z 2 Sided Copying(P.228)
z Mixed Size Originals(P.228)
z Edge Erase - Top Edge(P.228)
z Edge Erase - Bottom Edge(P.228)
z Edge Erase - Left Edge(P.228)
z Edge Erase- Right Edge(P.228)
z Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.228)
z Edge Erase - Side 2(P.228)
z Image Shift - Side 1(P.228)
z Image Shift - Side 2(P.229)
z Image Rotation(P.229)
z Image Rotation - Rotation Direction(P.229)
z Original Orientation(P.229)
System Settings
z Copy Output(P.229)
z Output Orientation(P.229)
z Sample Set(P.229)
z Stamp Text(P.229)
z
Stamp Position (Side 1)(P.229)
z Stamp Position (Side 2)(P.229)
z Stamp Size(P.229)
Stamp Color(P.229)
8
z
z Date Position (Side 1)(P.230)

z
Date Position (Side 2)(P.230)
z Date Size(P.230)
z Page Number Style(P.230)
z Page Number Position (Side 1)(P.230)
z
Page Number Position (Side 2)(P.230)
z Page Number Size(P.230)
z Bates Stamping - Number of Digits(P.230)
z
Bates Stamping - Position (Side 1)(P.230)
z Bates Stamping - Position (Side 2)(P.230)
z
Bates Stamping - Size(P.230)
z Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value(P.231)
z Booklet Creation - Covers Tray(P.231)
z
Covers - Front Cover Tray(P.231)
z Covers - Back Cover Tray(P.231)
z Insert Separators - Separators Tray(P.231)
189
8 System Settings
Copy Control (P.231) z Memory Full Procedure(P.231)

z
Maximum Stored Pages(P.232)
z
Auto Paper Off(P.232)
z Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy(P.232)
z Fine-tune 100%(P.232)
z Background Suppress Level (Photo& Text)
(P.232)
z
Background Suppression Level (Text)(P.233)
z Photo & Text/ Printed Original(P.233)
z Original Type - Lightweight Originals(P.233)
z Output Orientation - Reverse Order(P.233)
z Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet)(P.233)
z
Stamp Density(P.233)
z Stamp Position-Top Left(P.233)
z
Stamp Position-Top Center(P.233)
z
Stamp Position-Top Right(P.234)
z Stamp Position-Left Center(P.234)
z
Stamp Position-Center(P.234)
z
Stamp Position- Right Center(P.234)
z Stamp Position- Bottom Left(P.234)
z Stamp Position- Bottom Center(P.234)
z Stamp Position- Bottom Right(P.234)
z Date Position-Top Left(P.234)
z Date Position-Top Center(P.234)
z Date Position-Top Right(P.235)
z Date Position- Bottom Left(P.235)
z Date Position-Bottom Center(P.235)
z Date Position-Bottom Right(P.235)
z Page Number Position-Top Left(P.235)
z Page Number Position-Top Center(P.235)
z Page Number Position-Top Right(P.235)
z Page Number Position-Bottom Left(P.235)
z Page Number Position-Bottom Center(P.236)
System Settings
z Page Number Position-Bottom Right(P.236)

z Bates Stamping - Top Left(P.236)
z Bates Stamping - Top Center(P.236)
z Bates Stamping - Top Right(P.236)
z
Bates Stamping - Bottom Left(P.236)
z Bates Stamping - Bottom Center(P.236)
z Bates Stamping - Bottom Right(P.236)
8 Quantity Display(P.236)
z
z Maximum Number of Sets(P.237)

Original Size Defaults(P.237) z Original Size Defaults 1 to 17
Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.238) z Reduce/Enlarge Presets 1 to 12
Custom Colors(P.238) -
Annotation - Create Stamps(P.239) -
Scan Mode Settings
General Settings Tab(P.241) z

Feature in 2nd Column(P.241)
z Reduce/Enlarge - Button 2(P.241)
z Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3(P.241)
190
Scan Defaults (P.242) z Sharpness(P.242)

z
Shadow Suppression(P.242)
z
Original Orientation(P.242)
z Edge Erase(P.242)
z Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges(P.242)
z Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges(P.242)
z
Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.242)
Original Size Defaults(P.243) z Scan size buttons 1 to 17
Output Size Defaults(P.244) z Output Size buttons 1 to 17
Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.244) z
Preset % 1 to 12
Other Settings (P.245) z
Scan Service(P.245)
z Memory Full Procedure(P.245)
z
Maximum Stored Pages(P.245)
z Saturation(P.245)
z Background Suppression Level(P.245)
z
Shadow Suppression Level(P.245)
z
Color Space(P.245)
z TIFF Format(P.246)
z Image Transfer Screen(P.246)
Network Settings(P.247) z
Ethernet Setting(P.247)
z TCP/IP - Get IP Address(P.247)
z
TCP/IP - IP Address(P.248)
z
TCP/IP - Subnet Mask(P.248)
z
TCP/IP - Gateway Address(P.248)
z
Frame Type(P.248)
System Settings
Setup Menu
Paper Tray Attributes(P.203) -

System Administrator Login ID(P.249) -
System Administrator’s Passcode
(P.250)
-
8
Maximum Login Attempts(P.251) -

Create/Check User Accounts(P.253) z UserID(P.253)
z User Name(P.253)
z Passcode(P.253)
z Account Limit(P.254)
Feature Access(P.254)
Account xxxx - Copy Limit(P.254)
z Reset Total Impressions(P.255)
z Reset Account(P.255)
191
8 System Settings
Reset User Accounts(P.256) z All User Accounts(P.256)

z
All Feature Access Settings(P.256)
z
All Account Limits(P.256)
z Total Impressions(P.256)
z Print the Auditron Report(P.256)
z Reset(P.256)
System Administrator’s Meter (Copy -
Jobs) (P.257)
User Details Setup(P.257) z User ID Characters(P.257)
z Hide User ID (***)(P.257)
z Failed Access Log(P.258)
Passcode Entry from Control Panel -
(P.258)
Login Setup/Auditron Mode(P.258) z Local Machine Access(P.258)
z Auditron Mode(P.259)
System Settings
192
Entering Text
Entering Text
During operations, a screen sometimes appears for the entry of text. This section
describes how to enter such text.
In the text you can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.
Item Description
Entering letters and numerals Select [Alphanumeric].
If you select [Shift], capital letters appear. To return to
lowercase, select [Shift] once more.
Entering symbols Select [Symbol].
Entering a space Select [Space].
Deleting characters Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a
time.
System Settings
8
193
8 System Settings
Common Settings
In [Common Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine itself. The
following shows the reference section for each item.
Machine Clock/Timers..............................................................................................................195
Audio Tones..............................................................................................................................198
Screen/Button Settings..............................................................................................................200
Paper Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................203
Image Quality Adjustment ........................................................................................................211
Reports ......................................................................................................................................214
Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................215
Watermark.................................................................................................................................216
Other Settings............................................................................................................................217
1 In the [System Settings] screen,

select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.184).

System Settings
3 Select the feature to be set.
194
Common Settings
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the clock time, or the timer interval until power saving or reset features take
effect.
1 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].

2 Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3 Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric
keypad to enter a value.
Note • Depending on the item, entry
with the numeric keypad may
not always be possible.
4 Select [Close].
Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here is printed on lists
and reports.
1 Select [Date], and select [Change

Settings].
2 Select the date format.
3 Select Year/Month/Day.
System Settings
8
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here is printed on lists and reports.
1 Select [Time], and select [Change

Settings].
2 Select the display format.
3 When [12 Hour Clock] is selected,
select [AM] or [PM].
4 Set the hours and minutes.
195
8 System Settings
Auto Clear
If a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine automatically returns to
the initial screen.
Set the time from 30 to 240 seconds in 1 second increments. In order not to set this
feature, select [Off].
Note • Even if [Off] is selected, when there is no operation for 1 minute on the screen waiting for a
job command after scanning, the machine cancels the waiting condition and starts to
process the job.
1 Select [Auto Clear], and select

[Change Settings].
2 Select [Off] or [On].
3 If you selected [On], set the time.
Auto Job Release

Set the period to cancel the current job and start the next job when an error occurs
(document or paper jams, running out of paper, etc.) during making copies or printing
documents. In this case, jobs that can be continued are limited to those that only use
parts of the machine not affected by the error.
Set the period from 4 to 99 minutes in 1 minute increments. In order not to set this
feature, select [Off].
System Settings
1 Select [Auto Job Release], and

3 If you selected [On], set the time.
196
Common Settings
Printer Lockout Duration

The machine disables to print documents received and reports during a given period of
time.
1 Select [Printer Lockout Duration],

and select [Change Settings].
3 If you selected [On], specify a
starting time and an ending time to
disable printing, in 1 minute
increments.
Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver

In power saving mode, there is a Low Power mode and a Sleep mode, and when the
set time has elapsed, these modes are switched to in the following way, thus reducing
the power consumption.
Last selection on the machine Low Power mode Sleep mode
1 Select [Auto Power Saver/Energy

Saver], and select [Change
Settings].
2 Set Low Power mode and Sleep
mode.
System Settings
8
Note • There is no setting to disable switching to the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode.
From Last Selection to Low Power Mode

Specify a time period between the last operation and entering the Low Power mode in
the range from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.
Note • Configure the [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last
Selection to Low Power Mode] time.
From Last Selection to Sleep Mode

Specify a time period between the last selection and entering the Sleep mode from 1
to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT.
197
8 System Settings
Daylight Savings
With this feature enabled, the machine automatically adjusts the current time when the
summer time starts and ends. Specify the start and end dates of summer time period.
Audio Tones
Select whether or not to sound an alarm, for example when a job ends or there is a fault.
1 Select [Audio Tones].

Settings].
3 Select the setting value.
4 Select [Save].
Control Panel Select Tone

Select the sound to be made when a button displayed on the screen is correctly
selected.
You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
System Settings
Control Panel Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an
error occurs.
select [Off].
Base Tone
8 For a button that toggles (changes setting each time it is pressed), set the sound to be
made when in the home position. In the machine this sound is made when the
<Interrupt> button is released.
select [Off].
Machine Ready Tone

Set the sound for when the machine is ready to copy or print, after powering on, for
example.
select [Off].
Copy Job Complete Tone

Select the sound to be made when a copy completes normally.
select [Off].
198
Common Settings
Non-Copy Job Complete Tone

Select the sound to be made when a job other than copying completes.
select [Off].
Fault Tone
Select the sound to be made when there is an error termination.
select [Off].
Auto Clear Alert Tone

Select the sound to be made when the automatic clear feature is enabled and it is 5
seconds before automatically returning to the initial screen.
select [Off].
Alert Tone
Select the sound to be made when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the fault is
left unattended to.
select [Off].
Out of Paper Warning Tone

Select the sound to be made when there is no paper in the paper tray and the job is left
unattended to.
select [Off].
System Settings
Low Toner Alert Tone
Select the sound to be made when the toner cartridge is due to be replaced.
select [Off].
Stored Programming Tone

Select the sound to be made while recording in job memory. 8
You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].
Note • It is not possible to disable this sound.
199
8 System Settings
Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.
1 Select [Screen/Button Settings].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Screen Default
Set the initial screen display that appears after turning the machine on or canceling the
Power Saver mode.
1 Select [Screen Default], and select

[Change Settings].
2 Select the feature to be assigned.
System Settings
Screen After Auto Clear

Set service screens to be displayed after auto clear.
8 1 Select [Screen After Auto Clear],

and select [Change Settings].
2 Select [Last Selection Screen] or
[All Services].
200
Common Settings
Auto Display of Login Screen

Select whether to enable or disable auto-displaying of login screen.
1 Select [Auto Display of Login

Screen], and select [Change
Settings].
2 Select [Off] to disable auto-
displaying of login screen.
Custom Button 1 to 3
You can assign features such as Copy and Network Scanning to the custom buttons
on the control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [Not Set].
For more information, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.47).
Note • The operation settings can be registered in the [Stored Programming] screen. For
information on Stored Programming, refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.152).
• The default setting of [Custom Button 1] is [Copy].
1 Select any of [Custom Button 1] to

[Custom Button 3], and select
[Change Settings].
2 Select any item.
System Settings
8
All Services
Set the layout of buttons that appear in the [All Services] screen when the <All
Services> button on the control panel is pressed.
The layout of buttons shown on the [Button Layout on the Menu Screen] screen shows
the layout of buttons on the [All Services] screen.
If you select [Unassigned], the selected button position will remain empty.
Note • It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.
201
8 System Settings
1 Select [All Services], and select

[Change Settings].
2 Select the button in the position
where you want to display a
feature.
3 Select the feature to be displayed.
All Services - Additional Features

Set the layout of supplementary feature buttons that appear in the [All Services] screen
when the <All Services> button on the control panel is pressed.
System Settings
The Additional Features appear in the [Menu] screen as rectangular buttons.

The layout of numbers shown on the [All Services - Additional Features] screen shows
the layout of buttons on the [Menu] screen.
If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.
Note • It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.
8 1 Select [All Services - Additional

Features], and select [Change
Settings].
2 Select the button in the position
where you want to display a
feature.
3 Select the features to be displayed.
202
Common Settings
Job Type on Job Status Screen

Select the job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen of the [Job Status]
screen when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.
Paper Tray Settings

Set the items relating to the paper and trays, including the types of paper loaded in the
trays, precedence, and image processing settings for each paper.
1 Select [Paper Tray Settings].

Settings].
4 Set the setting value.
5 Select [Save].
Custom Paper Name

You can set a custom name to custom paper 1 to 5, plain paper, bond paper, and
recycled paper. You can use letters, numerals, and symbols in the name, up to 24
characters.
For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as “Color” for colored paper,
and “Covers” for bond paper.
System Settings
1 Select [Custom Paper Name].
Settings].
3 Enter the name.
8
Paper Tray Attributes

Configure the paper size and paper type to be loaded on Tray 1 to 3, Tray 5 (Bypass)
and Tray 6.
When loading non-standard size into a tray, select [Variable Size] and specify the width
and height. When loading standard size paper, select [Auto Size Detect].
203
8 System Settings
1 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].

Settings].
3 Select [ChangeSettings].
4 Select [Paper Size] or [Paper

Type].
System Settings
8
Paper Size
The machine automatically detects standard size paper loaded into the Trays 1 and 2.
However, when a non-standard size paper is loaded, it is necessary to specify the width
and height.
Important • Align the paper guide to the paper edge in a tray. It prevents paper from paper jams or
errors. In such cases, use the tray 5 (bypass).
• Paper size loaded in the tray 3 to 4 cannot be changed.
204
Common Settings
1 Select [Auto Size Detect] or

[Variable Size].
2 When [Variable Size] is selected,
specify the size of paper using [ ],
[ ], [ ], and [ ].
z Auto Size Detect

Standard sized paper loaded in trays is automatically detected.
z
Variable Size
When setting non-standard size into the Tray 1 to 2, set the size in the X (horizontal)
direction within the range 182 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the
range 140 to 297 mm in 1mm increments.
Paper Type
You can set paper type for paper loaded in trays.
Auto Paper Select

The automatically selected paper tray can be designated according to the output color
settings. In any mode other than the specified output color mode, the designated tray
will not be selected when the paper tray is set to auto. Choose from [For All Output
Colors], [When Color is Selected Only], or [When Black is Selected Only].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is
System Settings
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.
You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6. The Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be selected.
.
205
8 System Settings
Customize Paper Supply Screen

Set what is displayed as on a paper in the paper tray selection screen.
1 Select [Customize Paper Supply

Screen].
2 Select any item.
Paper Color
Select whether or not to display paper color.
Other Attributes
Select whether to display the attributes.
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu

You can select whether [Paper Size/Type] is displayed in the [Setup Menu] screen or
not.
Displaying [Paper Size/Type] in the [Setup Menu] screen allows users to configure the
paper size and type loaded in the tray without entering the System Administration
mode.
System Settings
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

You can select whether the [Change Settings] screen ([Paper Size/Type] screen) for
the target tray is displayed or not when pulling out or inserting the tray.
Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.
206
Common Settings
Paper Tray Priority

Set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection.
You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6. The tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.
1 Select [Paper Tray Priority].

3 Select any of numbers 1 to 4, to
assign a tray from the Trays 1 to 4
and 6.
Note • You cannot set the same
paper tray to different
positions in the sequence.
Paper Type Priority

Set the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection.
You can set plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper and custom paper 1 to 5.
The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence.
If different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is
determined by tray priority sequence.
System Settings
For a tray that is loaded with a paper type with [Auto Paper Off] set, automatic tray
selection is not performed.
For information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.207).
1 Select [Paper Type Priority].

Settings]. 8
3 Select the priority sequence.
207
8 System Settings
Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults

Set the paper sizes shown in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen for [Paper Selection] when
copying with the Tray 5 (Bypass).
You can assign 20 paper sizes to Tray 5 standard size buttons 1 to 20.
If a non-standard size paper is frequently used for copying, by setting this size, it is no
longer necessary to set the paper dimensions each time a copy is made. It is also
convenient to set the commonly used paper sizes toward the top.
1 Select [Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper

Size Defaults].
Settings].
3 Select the paper size.
4 When [Variable Size] is selected,

set the numeric values using [ ],
[ ], [ ], and [ ].
System Settings
A/B Series Size

You can select from 10 sizes of A and B series.
8 Inch Size
You can select from 14 sizes of inch series.
Others
You can select from 15 other sizes.
Variable Size
You can specify any sizes. Specify width (X) from 100 to 483 mm and height (Y) from
100 to 305 mm in 1mm increments.
208
Common Settings
Auto Tray Switching

Set the method of auto tray switching when the selected tray runs out of paper.
1 Select [Auto Tray Switching].

3 Select the method of switching.
Enable during Auto Paper

When the paper selection is [Auto]
only, the machine automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper.
Always Enable
Regardless of the setting of [Paper Supply], the machine automatically selects a tray
containing appropriate paper according to the situation.
Note • Auto tray switching cannot be worked at the following.
• When the Tray 5 (Bypass) is selected
• When a tray containing paper other than plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper or
user-defined paper is selected
• When a tray containing paper set to [Auto Paper Off] at [Paper Type Priority] is selected
Image Quality
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of plain paper, recycled
System Settings
paper, heavyweight paper 1, heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2,
heavy paper 2 (side 2), and custom paper 1 to 5.
When the machine is copying or printing, the type of paper set in [Paper Type], and the
image quality processing specified for that type of paper are used to control the image
quality.

2 Select the item to be set or 8
Settings].
3 Select image quality processing.
4 Select [Save].
209
8 System Settings
Refer to the following table for the items that can be set.
For information about paper characteristics and notes on use, refer to "Supported Paper Weight and
Quantity" (P.158).
Setting values Meaning

Plain Paper A Paper having ream weight of 64 - 80 g/m2.
Plain Paper B Paper having ream weight of 81 - 105 g/m2.
Plain Paper C Thin coated paper, intermediate paper, etc.
Plain Paper - Special 1 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.
Plain Paper - Special 2 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.
Recycled A Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 64 -
80 g/m2.
Recycled B Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 81 -
105 g/m2.
Heavyweight 1A Paper having ream weight of 106 - 128 g/m2.
Heavyweight 1B Paper having ream weight of 129 - 176 g/m2.
Heavyweight 1 - Special 1 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.
Heavyweight 2C Postal cards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.
Heavyweight 2D Postcards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.
Heavyweight 2E Envelopes, etc.
System Settings
8 Coated 1A Coated paper having ream weight of 106 - 128 g/m2.

Coated 1B Coated paper having ream weight of 129 - 176 g/m2.
210
Common Settings
Image Quality Adjustment

You can set the image quality and calibration settings.
1 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].

Settings].
5 Select [Save].
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine is scanning an
original.

Settings].
System Settings
Photo & Text Recognition

You can change the level at which the machine separates text from photos while
scanning the original, when copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen
set to [Text & Photo]. 8
Selecting [More Text] makes it easier for very fine print to be recognized as text.
Selecting [More Photo] makes it easier for newspaper and advertisement halftone
images to be recognized as photos.
Output Color Recognition

In the [General Settings] screen, when copying with [Output Color] set to [Auto], you
can change the five level at which the machine distinguishes monochrome and color
images.
Selecting [More Black] makes originals more easily recognized as monochrome.
Selecting [More Color] makes originals more easily recognized as color.
Photo Reproduction Level

When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo],
you can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine to
be photos.
211
8 System Settings
Selecting [More Text] emphasizes the dense parts of the image, yielding a bold copy
effect.
Selecting [More Photo] makes the gradation of the photo parts of the image softer.
Background Suppression (Color Copy)

Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making color copies.
Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the original and detect the background
color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect
the background color.
Important • When you select [High Quality], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio
not greater than 60% in [Reduce/Enlarge] is set, a part of an image may not be printed or
blank paper may be output.
Background Suppression (B/W Copy)

Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making monochrome copies.
color.
Important • When you select [High Quality]], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)

Set the method of auto exposure to be used when scanning.
System Settings
color.
Important • When you select [High Quality]], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio
8 Image Enhancement
You can select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], copy
data is smoothed, to give a smoother appearance.
Calibration
When the color gradation of a printed image is shifted, the gradation can be adjusted.
By means of this adjustment, the print image quality of the machine can be maintained
at a constant level.
For information about procedures for calibration, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).
Note • If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of calibration, contact
our Customer Support Center.
212
Common Settings
1 Select [Calibration].
Screen Type
z
Copy Job
Adjusts the gradation for copying
documents.
z
Print Job 1
Basic screen for printing.
For PCL print drivers
Adjusts the gradation for items other than [Graphic] and [Presentation] of [Color
Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.
For PostScript printers
Adjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.
Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction]
and [CMYK Correction], when [Auto] is selected.
z
Print Job 2
Adjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.
Adjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.
Paper Supply
System Settings
Select a tray to be used for calibration.
Target
Select whether to apply calibration to copy and print jobs, copy jobs only, print jobs
only, or none.
213
8 System Settings
Reports
These settings relate to printing reports.
1 Select [Reports].
Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Print Report Button

Select whether to allow printing of reports during normal operation in the System
Administration mode. When this option is disabled, [Print Report Button] appears only
in [Print Report/List] on the [Billing Meter/Print Report] tab under [Machine Status] and
[Error History Report] on the [Faults] tab, while in the System Administration mode.
For [Print Report/List] and [Error History Report], refer to "Machine Status" (P.269)
Job History Report

You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Job History Report] when a total
of 50 jobs have been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.
2 Sided Report
Select whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided when printing a report/list.
System Settings
214
Common Settings
Maintenance
You can initialize the hard disk or delete data recorded in the machine.
1 Select [Maintenance].
2 Select the item to be carried out.
Initialize Hard Disk

This initializes the hard disk.
The data erased by the formatting includes supplementary fonts, HP-GL/2 form, and
SMB folders.
Note • The secure print documents and logs are not erased.
1 Select [Initialize Hard Disk].

2 Select the partition to be
reformatted, and select [Start].
System Settings
8
3 Select [Yes].
4 When the initialization completes successfully, the message appears on the screen;
select [Confirm].
215
8 System Settings
Delete All Data

This feature is used to prevent leakage of customer's confidential information, when the
machine is replaced. All data registered in the machine is deleted, when executing
[Delete All Data].
Do not use this function.
Software Options
This feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Adjust Image Position

This feature is used to adjust the position of printed image. The image position can be
adjusted according to paper tray, paper type, and Side 1 and side 2 of paper.
You can use this feature if you want to align the printed image on Side 1 with that on
Side 2, for example when printing documents with registration marks or when cutting
the paper. The image position is shifted in the X (horizontal) direction and in the Y
(vertical) direction accordingly.
Note • Changing the image position may cause the image to be out of range of the paper. Adjust
the value while checking the print result.
Watermark
You can configure the Watermark.
Date Format
Set the format for printing dates in
annotations and Watermark. This
setting is common to annotation
System Settings
and Watermark.
Three types of format are available:
20yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/20yy, and dd/
mm/20yy.
Text Effect Default
8 Set the text effects for Watermark.
Off
A text effect is not applied.
Embossed
The text hidden in the background is printed as embossing. The text part of the text is
printed with the pattern set in [Watermark - Background Pattern].
Outline
The text hidden in the background is printed as white cutout. In the background other
than the text printed as white cutout, the pattern set in [Watermark - Background
Pattern] is printed.
Text Default
Set the text string to be displayed by default.
You can select from Copy Prohibited, Copy, Duplicate, and custom settings.
216
Common Settings
Text Size
Set the size of the text printed in Watermark.
You can select from 3 point sizes: 48 point, 64 point, and 80 point.
You can also set the value from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.
Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to be used for the Watermark text effect.
You can select from eight patterns: wave, circle, stripe, chain, beam, rhombic,
sunflower, and fan.
Color
Set the color used for printing Watermark text.
You can select from 3 colors: black, magenta, and cyan.
Density
Set the density for printing the text in Watermark.
You can select from three levels from lighten to darken.
Text/Background Contrast
Set the text/background contrast for printing Watermark.
You can select from contrast levels 1 to 9.
Force Watermark - Copy Job

Set whether to force Watermark printing for copying.
Custom Text 1 to 3
System Settings
Set the character string to be displayed as a custom option in [Text Default].
Other Settings
These are other settings relating to the machine itself.
1
2
Select [Other Settings].
Select the item to be set or
8
Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Auto Job Promotion

You can select whether to allow other jobs that can be started to automatically bypass
the job, if the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example,
running out of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).
217
8 System Settings
Note • Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints are excluded from bypassing
permission.
Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)

Set the offset feature for the finisher tray.
When you select offset stacking, each of output documents is delivered at a slightly
shifted position from the position of the previous document. If the previous document
is delivered at the front side of the machine, the next document is delivered at the rear
side of the machine. Set the operation of this offset feature.
None
No offset output.
Offset per set

Output paper in the number of copy sets being made.
Offset per job

Output paper with each job offset.
Default Print Paper Size

Set the paper size used when printing reports or lists.
You can select from 2 sizes: A4, or 8.5 x 11 inches.
System Settings
218
Common Settings
Paper Size Settings

Set the paper sizes for standard size originals and for automatic paper detection.
You can select from 5 types: A/B series (8 x 13”), A/B series, A/B series (8K/16K), A/B
series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”), and inch series.
Refer to the following table for the combinations of sizes that can be detected
automatically.
Paper size group A/B series (8 x 13”) A/B series
Original position
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 2
Trays 3 to 4
Trays 1 to 2
Trays 3 to 4
Tray 6
Tray 6
Size/Orientation
A6 O - - - - - O - - - - -
A5 O O O - O - O O O - O -
A5 O - - - - - O O - - - -
A4 O O O - O - O O O - O -
A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O
A3 O O O - O - O O O - O -
B6 O - - - - - O - - - - -
B6 - - - - - - O - - - - -
B5 - - O - O - O O O - O -
B5 - O O O O O O O O O O O
B4 - O O - O - O O O - O -
5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - -
System Settings
5.5 x 8.5 - O - - - - - - - - - -
7.25 x 10.5 O O - - - - - - - - - -
8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -
8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -
8.5 x 11 - O O - - - - O O - - -
8.5 x 11 O O O O - O - O O O - O
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 14
O
-
O
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
11 x 17 O O O - - - - O O - - -
16K - - - - - - - - - - - -
16K - - O - - - - O O - - -
8K - - O - - - - O - - - -
Postcard - - - - - - - - - - - -
Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - -
4x6 - - - - - - - - - - - -
4x6 - - - - - - - - - - - -
219
8 System Settings
Paper size group A/B series (8 K/ 16 K) A/B series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”) Inch series
Original position
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
Trays 1 to 2
Trays 3 to 4
Trays 1 to 2
Trays 3 to 4
Trays 1 to 2
Trays 3 to 4
Tray 6
Tray 6
Tray 6
Size/Orientation
A6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -
A5 O O O - O - O O O - O - - - - - - -
A5 O O - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -
A4 O O O - - - O O O - - - - O O - - -
A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - O
A3 O O O - O - O O O - O - O O O - - -
B6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -
B6 O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B5 O O O - O - O - O - O - - - O - O -
B5 O O O O O O O O O O O O - O - - - -
B4 O O O - O - O O O - O - - O O - - -
5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - - O O O - O -
5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - O O - - - - O O - - - -
7.25 x 10.5 - - - - - - - O - - - - O O O O - O
8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - -
8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8.5 x 11 - O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -
System Settings
8.5 x 11 - O O O - O O O O O - O O O O O O O
8.5 x 13 - - O - O - O O O - O - - - O - - -
8.5 x 14 - - O - O - - - O - O - O O O - O -
11 x 17 O O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -
16K O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
16K O O O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - -
8 8K
Postcard
O
-
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -
Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4x6 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -
4x6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
220
Common Settings
Millimeters/Inches
Select whether dimensions on the screen are shown in millimeters or inches.
Keyboard Input Restriction

Select whether to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard on the machine. To prevent
characters being garbled when switched from one character set to another, you can
restrict the input to ASCII characters only. If you select [On (ASCII only)], the displayed
keyboard shows ASCII characters only.
Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Select whether or not there is a continuous scrolling effect when the scroll buttons are
held down.
Disable Fast Scrolling

Holding down the scroll buttons does not scroll.
Enable Fast Scrolling

Holding down the scroll buttons causes continuous scrolling.
Display Consumables Screen

Select whether to display the supplies screen. If yes, select [When power is switched
on] or [When Auto Clear is activated].
Overwrite Hard Disk

Select whether or not to carry out hard disk overwrite erasing. If so, you can select
whether to overwrite once or three times.
After deleting data from the hard disk, the area on which the data was stored is
overwritten. This prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on
System Settings
the hard disk. This applies to copy source, and other information stored temporarily by
the system.
Important • If the machine is powered off during the overwriting operation, unfinished files may remain
on the hard disk.
• The data is erased by overwriting once, but overwriting three times makes it even more
definite that the data cannot be recovered. It does, however, take longer.
• During the overwriting process, processing of normal operations may be slowed down.
For information about how to check the status during the overwriting process, refer to "Overwrite Hard
Disk" (P.271).
8
221
8 System Settings
Data Encryption
Select whether to encrypt the data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.
By setting data encryption, when copy or print data is written to the hard disk it is
automatically encrypted. The encryption prevents unauthorized access to the stored
data. In order to activate this feature, set an encryption key.
Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
1 Select [Data Encryption].

2 Select [On].
3 Select [Keyboard], and enter an
encryption key of up to 12 digits.
4 Select [Save].
5 Using the same procedure, enter
the same encryption key once
more.
Data Restoration
The enciphered data cannot be restored at the following.
z When a trouble occurs in the hard disk.
z When you have forgotten the encryption key.
z When you have forgotten the System Administrator UserID and a Passcode when
making the [Service Rep. Restricted Operation] set to [On].
Data encryption feature and changing the settings

System Settings
When data encryption is started or cancelled, and when the encryption key is changed,
the machine must be restarted. The corresponding recording area (the hard disk) is
reformatted when restarting. In this case, the previous data is not guaranteed.
The recording area stores the following data.
- Spooled print data
- Secure print, sample print, and similar print data
8 - Forms for the form overlay feature
- Mailbox and job flow sheet settings (box name, passcodes, etc.)
- Documents in mailbox
Important • Be sure to save all necessary settings and documents before starting to use the data
encryption feature or changing the settings.
• An error occurs if the connected hard disk does not match the encryption settings. For
information on error messages and their remedies, refer to "Other Errors" (P.343).
• The following procedure is recommended for changing the settings of the encryption while a
large amount of data (100 jobs or more) is stored in a mailbox, and [Overwrite Hard Disk] is
specified to [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites].
1. Select [System Settings] > [Setup Menu] > [Mailbox] to display the [Mailbox] screen.
2. Select the mailbox, then select [Create / Delete] > [Delete Mailbox].
3. Select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen is displayed. Then select [Exit] to exit the
system administration mode.
4. Press the <Machine Status> button, then make sure that [Standby] in [Overwrite Hard Disk]
is displayed.
5. Enter the System Administration mode, and change the data encryption settings. For
information on how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.184).
222
Common Settings
Encryption Key for Confidential Data

Use this feature to set the encryption key to protect confidential data recorded on the
hard disk of the machine. Select [Keyboard], enter an encryption key. and then re-enter
the same key to confirm.
Service Rep. Restricted Operation

This feature protects the Security Kit settings from being changed by an outsider pretending to
be our customer engineer. Select whether to permit our customer engineer to perform
[Overwrite Hard Disk] and [Data Encryption] operations, and to change the [HTTP - SSL/TLS],
[System Administrator Login ID], [System Administrator’s Passcode], and [Maximum Login
Attempts] settings.
Important • When [On] is selected, make sure not to forget the system administrator's UserID and
Passcode. If this happens, the machine must be reset to the factory defaults. Contact our
Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our
Software Download
This feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Document Feeder Tray Elevation

When a document is loaded in the document feeder, set to which timing to raise an
elevator tray can be performed. Select from [When loading originals] and [When
pressing Start].
Note • This feature does not appear for some models.
Gloss Level
Set whether to display the gloss level feature.
System Settings
When [Enable] is selected, the [Gloss] button appears in [Image Quality] of the [Copy]
screen.
Select [Enable] if the following feature is used in the print mode of the print driver.
Note • When you use the print mode above from the print driver. 1024MB system memory is
needen in the machine.
Estimated Job Time

The information to display can be set when displaying prediction time until it completes
8
to the waiting job for a print.
Cumulative time for all jobs

Displays the remaining time.
Time required for single job

Displays the time required.
223
8 System Settings
Copy Mode Settings
In [Copy Mode Settings], you can make settings relating to the copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each item.
General Settings Tab - Features Allocation ..............................................................................225
Preset Buttons ...........................................................................................................................225
Copy Defaults ...........................................................................................................................226
Copy Control.............................................................................................................................231
Original Size Defaults...............................................................................................................237
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................238
Custom Colors...........................................................................................................................238
Annotation - Create Stamps ......................................................................................................239

Procedure" (P.184).
2 Select [Copy Mode Settings].

System Settings
8
224
Copy Mode Settings
General Settings Tab - Features Allocation

You can set the features that appear in the third and fourth columns from the left of the
[General Settings] screen. By setting the most commonly used features, you can avoid
extra operations such as selecting tabs.
1 Select [General Settings Tab -

Features Allocation], and select
[Change Settings].
2 Select the number of features to be
displayed.
3 From the buttons appearing on the
right, select the position where you
want to allocate a feature.
Note • The position of the buttons on
the right of the screen shows
the position of the buttons in
the [General Settings] screen.
5 Features
The [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Output
Format] features are displayed on the [Copy] screen. You cannot change the displayed
features and their positions.
7 Features
You can set the features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen. Up
to 3 features can be allocated. [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot
be allocated.
10 Features
You can set the features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Copy]
screen. Up to 5 features can be allocated. However, [Output Color] at the top in the third
System Settings
column is fixed.
Note • [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be allocated.
4 Select [Features] or [Settings].
5 Select the feature to be displayed, and select [Save].
6 Repeat operations as required.
8
Preset Buttons
You can set the items that appear in the preset buttons of the [General Settings]
screen. By setting the most commonly used items, you can avoid extra operations such
as selecting tabs.
Paper Supply - Button 2-5

For the 6 feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings] screen,
you can set the second, third, fourh, and fifth paper tray.
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3-5

For the 6 feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings]
screen, you can set the ratio for the third, fourh, and fifth row from the top.
You can select the ratio from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.238).
225
8 System Settings
Copy Defaults
This sets the default settings of copy feature settings. When the power is turned on or
the machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use
as defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.
1 Select [Copy Defaults].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Paper] cannot be
selected for [Paper Supply].
Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.
Select the ratio from the buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons, [100%], and [Auto
%].
System Settings
When the default setting for [Paper Supply] is [Auto], [Auto %] cannot be selected for
[Reduce/Enlarge].
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [General Settings] screen.
8 When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [General Settings] screen
before making copies.
Single Color - Color

Set the default value for [Output Color] > [More...] > [Single Color] in the [General
Settings] screen. You can select from 6 preset colors and 6 custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).
Dual Color - Source Color

Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Output
Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings] screen.
After selecting [Color Selection], you can select from 6 colors.
Dual Color - Target Area Color

Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] >
[More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings Tab] screen. You can select
from 7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.
226
Copy Mode Settings
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color

Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] >
[More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings] screen. You can select from
7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)

This is valid when an item other than [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the
[General Settings Tab] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Black)

This is valid when [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [General Settings] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality]
screen.
System Settings
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Sharpness/Saturation] in the [Image Quality]
screen.
Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Sharpness/Saturation] in the [Image Quality]
screen.
8
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text],
or [Map].
Color Balance - Yellow

Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.
You can set density levels of yellow for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density],
and [High Density].
Color Balance - Magenta

You can set density levels of magenta for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density],
and [High Density].
227
8 System Settings
Color Balance - Cyan

You can set density levels of cyan for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and
[High Density].
Color Balance - Black

You can set density levels of black for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and
[High Density].
Color Shift
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Layout Adjustment] and [Output
Format] screens.
Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase - Top Edge

Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the top
direction in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The edge erase width can
be set within the range of 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge

Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the bottom
System Settings
be set within the range 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.
Edge Erase - Left Edge

Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the left
8 Edge Erase- Right Edge
Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the right
Center Erase/Binding Erase

Set the default value for the center erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
The center erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
Edge Erase - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] that is displayed when [Independent Edge Erase] is
selected from [Edge Erase] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Shift - Side 1

Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
228
Copy Mode Settings
Image Shift - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction

Set the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction], If documents are of
mixed orientations.
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Copy Output
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [General Settings] screen.
Note • If no option is installed in the machine, even when [Collated] is selected, the machine
operates as [Uncollated].
Output Orientation
Set the default value for [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.
Sample Set
Set the default value for [Sample Set] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Stamp Text
Set the default value for [Text] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in
the [Output Format] screen.
System Settings
You can select a stamp type from eight preset types and custom text.
For information about how to set custom text, refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).
Stamp Position (Side 1)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the date stamp
8
from the six choices provided.
Stamp Position (Side 2)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the date
stamp Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.
Stamp Size
Set the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the
[Output Format] screen.
Stamp Color
Set the default value for [Color] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in
229
8 System Settings
Date Position (Side 1)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the date stamp
from the six choices provided.
Date Position (Side 2)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the date
stamp Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.
Date Size
Set the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is selected in the
[Output Format] screen.
Page Number Style

Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen.
Page Number Position (Side 1)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page
Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the
page number from the six choices provided.
Page Number Position (Side 2)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page
Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place
the page number Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.
Page Number Size

System Settings
Set the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is
Bates Stamping - Number of Digits

Set the default value for [Number of Digits] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates
Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.
8 Bates Stamping - Position (Side 1)
Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates
Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the
bates stamping from the six choices provided.
Bates Stamping - Position (Side 2)

Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates
Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place
the bates stamping Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.
Bates Stamping - Size

Set the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates Stamping] is
230
Copy Mode Settings
Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value

Set the default value for [Shift Value] of [Tab Margin Shift] in the [Output Format]
screen.
Booklet Creation - Covers Tray

Set the default value for [Covers] of [Booklet Creation - Paper Tray Settings] in the
[Booklet Creation] screen.
Covers - Front Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Front Cover] of [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] in the [Covers]
screen.
Covers - Back Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Back Cover] of [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] in the [Covers]
screen.
Insert Separators - Separators Tray

Set the default value for [Separators Tray] in the [Build Job - Separators] screen.
Copy Control
These settings relate to copy operation control.
1 Select [Copy Control].

Settings].
System Settings
4 Select [Save].
Memory Full Procedure

8
When the space of the hard disk runs out during scanning originals, a screen appears
asking how the partly stored data should be handled.
Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the
subsequent processing is determined by these settings.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job
Release" (P.196).
Cancel Job
The stored data is discarded.
Run Job
The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is copied.
231
8 System Settings
Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of stored pages of a copy original. You can set a number
from 1 to 999 pages.
Auto Paper Off

Select the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings Tab] screen
is cancelled (the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] is selected in the [General
Settings] screen, and [Auto %] or [Independent X-Y %] is selected for [Reduce/
Enlarge]).
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy

When the size of side 1 differs from that of side 2 in 2-sided copy, if different size of
originals for side 1 and side 2 are selected by automatic paper supply, sets the paper
to copy side 2 of original.
Important • When the side 1 and side 2 of the originals are different, and if 2-side of originals are copied
of that of same paper, an image may be missing.
Off (Copy on new sheet)

Side 2 is copied on the front of a new sheet.
On
Side 2 is copied on the opposite side of Side 1 without changing the paper size.
Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune the magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value
is applied when [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Proportional %] on the [General Settings] screen
is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction within the range 98 to 102% in 0.1% increments.
System Settings
Important • This feature is applied only when a copy is made by the document glass. Moreover, it is not
reflected in the magnification (100%) set by [Variable %], [Independent X-Y%] and
[Calculator %].
Note • A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is set.
1 Select [Fine-tune 100%], and

8 2 Enter the magnification using [

[ ], [ ], and [ ].
],
Background Suppress Level (Photo& Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo &
Text] is selected for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
232
Copy Mode Settings
Background Suppression Level (Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
Photo & Text/ Printed Original

Set the type of original when [Halftone] of [Text & Photo] is selected for [Original Type]
in the [Image Quality] screen.
Normal
Copy with standard image quality.
Inkjet Originals
Select when copying an original printed with an inkjet printer. This improves the
recognition of inkjet colors.
Highlighted Originals
Select when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This improves the
recognition of the highlight pen colors.
Original Type - Lightweight Originals

When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether
to display a special original ([Lightweight Originals]).
Output Orientation - Reverse Order

Specify whether to display [Face Up Reverse Order] under the [Output Orientation] in
System Settings
Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet)
Set operations when selecting [Auto] under the [Output Orientation] in the [Output
Format] screen.
Stamp Density
Set the translucency of the stamp printed as annotation.
You can select from three translucency values: 0% (solid), 25%, and 50%. The 0% 8
represents no translucency.
Note • If the stamp with [0%] density is printed over text, the text may no longer be readable.
Stamp Position-Top Left

When selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format]
screen for printing, you can turn the print position finely.
Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical
position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.
Stamp Position-Top Center

When selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the print position finely.
233
8 System Settings
Stamp Position-Top Right

When selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format]
screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.
Stamp Position-Left Center

When selecting [Left Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.
Stamp Position-Center
When selecting [Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format]
screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.
Stamp Position- Right Center

When selecting [Right Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
Stamp Position- Bottom Left

When selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
System Settings
Stamp Position- Bottom Center

When selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
8 position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.
Stamp Position- Bottom Right

When selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the print position finely.
Date Position-Top Left

When selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format]
screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.
Date Position-Top Center

When selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format]
screen for printing, you can turn the date position finely.
234
Copy Mode Settings
Date Position-Top Right

When selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format]
Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical
Date Position- Bottom Left

When selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format]
Date Position-Bottom Center

When selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.
Date Position-Bottom Right

When selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.
Page Number Position-Top Left
System Settings
When selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.
Page Number Position-Top Center

When selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the
[Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely. 8
position within the range 0 to 200in 0.5mm increments.
Page Number Position-Top Right

When selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.
Page Number Position-Bottom Left

When selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the
[Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.
235
8 System Settings
Page Number Position-Bottom Center

When selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the
Page Number Position-Bottom Right

When selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the
Bates Stamping - Top Left

When selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output
Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.
Bates Stamping - Top Center

When selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the
[Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.
Bates Stamping - Top Right

When selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the
System Settings
Bates Stamping - Bottom Left

When selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the
8 position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.
Bates Stamping - Bottom Center

When selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the
Bates Stamping - Bottom Right

When selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the
Quantity Display
Set the method of displaying counter.
236
Copy Mode Settings
Select from Quantity and Memory, Quantity and Original Count and Quantity (Big Font).
Maximum Number of Sets

Set the maximum number of allowed copy sets between 1 and 999. Users will not be
able to specify the number of copy sets larger than the value set here.
Original Size Defaults

Set the original sizes that appear in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
An original size is assigned to each of the buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].
When frequently making copies of non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-
standard size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a copy is made.
1 Select [Original Size Defaults].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
A/B Series Size
System Settings
You can select from sizes of A and B series.
Inch Size
You can select from sizes of inch series.
Others
You can select from other sizes.
Variable Size
8
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from
15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.
237
8 System Settings
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications shown in [Proportional %], in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General
Settings] screen.
You can assign any magnification to each of the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 12.
1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in [Output Color].
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan
(0 to 100%) to each of custom color buttons 1 to 6.
1 Select [Custom Colors].

Settings].
System Settings

8 3 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].

Note • Adjust so that the total of
yellow, magenta, and cyan
does not exceed 240%.
4 Select [Save].
238
Copy Mode Settings
Annotation - Create Stamps

Set any string to be displayed as stamp text for annotation.
You can assign up to 8 custom stamps.
1 Select [Annotation - Create

Stamps].
Settings].
3 Selelct [Keyboard] and enter any
stamp text used for annotation.
4 Select [Save].
System Settings
8
239
8 System Settings
Scan Mode Settings
Make settings relating to the scanner feature.

When using the Webtools, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to "Utilities"
contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
General Settings Tab.................................................................................................................241
Scan Defaults ............................................................................................................................242
Original Size Defaults...............................................................................................................243
Output Size Defaults .................................................................................................................244
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................244
Other Settings............................................................................................................................245

Procedure" (P.184).
System Settings
2 Select [Scan Mode Settings].
240
Scan Mode Settings
General Settings Tab

Set items relating to the [General Settings Tab] screen display.
1 Select [General Settings Tab].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Feature in 2nd Column
System Settings
You can set the features shown in the second column of the [General Settings] screen.
You can select from [2 Sided Originals], [Scan Resolution], [Lighten/Darken], and
[Reduce/Enlarge].
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 2
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Set the magnification shown in the second row from the top of the 5 feature buttons
shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.
8
Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Set the magnification shown in the third row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown
in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.
Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
241
8 System Settings
Scan Defaults
Set the default values for the scanner feature. When the power is turned on or the
machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed,
the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use as
defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.
The values set become valid after the power has been turned off and on again.
1 Select [Scan Defaults].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] when scanning.
System Settings
Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can
select from [Normal] or [Variable Erase].
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

8 Set the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the top and
bottom directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Set the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the left and
right directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0
to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Center Erase/Binding Erase

Set the default value for the binding erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
242
Scan Mode Settings
Original Size Defaults

Set the original size shown in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. An
original size is assigned to each of the buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].
When frequently scanning non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-standard
size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a document is scanned.
1 Select [Original Size Defaults].

Settings].
Select [Save].
A/B Series Size

You can select from sizes of A and B series.
Inch Size
You can select from sizes of inch series.
Others
You can select from other sizes, including photo and postcard.
System Settings
Variable Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from
243
8 System Settings
Output Size Defaults

Set the sizes to be displayed at [Output Size] when selecting [Auto %] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Any output sizes can be assigned to output size buttons.
By setting the commonly used sizes, you can reduce the number of selection
operations for scanning.
A/B Series Size

You can select from sizes of A and
B series.
Inch Size
You can select from sizes of inch
series.
Others
You can select from other sizes,
including photo and postcard.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications shown in [Proportional %] for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout
Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%].
Preset %
System Settings
You can select from ratios for

[Preset %].
Variable %
You can set any magnification. Set
the value from 25 to 400% in 1%
increments.
8
244
Scan Mode Settings
Other Settings
These settings relate to the scanner feature specification.
1 Select [Other Settings].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Scan Service
Set whether or not to use the scanner feature.
Memory Full Procedure

While scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space for the scanner, a
screen appears, asking how the partly stored data should be handled.
Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the
subsequent processing is determined by these settings.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job
Release" (P.196).
Cancel Job
System Settings
The stored data is discarded.
Run Job
The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is treated as a
complete stored file.
Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of stored pages of a scan original. You can set a number
from 1 to 999 pages.
8
Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color original. When carrying out a scan, it is
automatically adjusted according to this setting value.
Background Suppression Level

For a color scan, set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background
Suppression] is set to [Auto Suppression].
Shadow Suppression Level

Set the show-through prevention level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [On]..
Color Space
Set whether to display the color space feature.
245
8 System Settings
TIFF Format
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select from [TIFF V6] and [TTN2].
Image Transfer Screen

Select whether to display a message when the scan of an original is completed.
Disabled
Do not show a scan completion message.
Display Message Only

Show a scan completion message.
Display Message and Screen
Show a screen while original is being scanned, and also a scan completion message.
System Settings
246
In [Network Settings], set the type of interface through which the machine is connected
to the client in TCP/IP, and the parameters required for communications.
Network Settings
Set the parameters required for communications.
1 Select [Network Settings].

Settings].
4 Select [Save].
Ethernet Setting
Set the Ethernet Setting for the machine. Select [Auto] if your network environment is
mixed or if you do not know the network speed. If you know the speed of the network
to which the machine is attached, select it. If your network is 1000Base-T, select [Auto].
System Settings
TCP/IP - Get IP Address
Select the procedure for setting the IP address on the machine.
Select one of the following settings.
DHCP
The IP adress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from
the DHCP server.
8
BOOTP
The IP adress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from
the BOOTP server.
Manual
Enables you to manually enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address.
247
8 System Settings
TCP/IP - IP Address
This option is only available if you have selected [Manual] from the previous option.
Enter the IP address from the Control Panel Numeric Keypad and then click [Next].
You must change the default to a valid address for your network.
Note • Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric value in
the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through
• When you made an entry mistake, press the <C> (clear) button and enter again.
• When you move to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select [save/select next].
TCP/IP - Subnet Mask

This option lets you modify the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet.
Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric
value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX
through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
Note • Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252,
254, and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.
TCP/IP - Gateway Address

Use this option to set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. If your network
uses a gateway, you must change the default to a correct gateway address for your
network.
Note • Enter the gateway address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric
value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through
Frame Type
System Settings
Select [Auto] if your network environment is mixed or if you do not know the frame type
of the network. If you know the frame type of the network to which the machine is
attached, select it.
248
In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and
Passcode.
You are recommended to set the system administrator ID and Passcode to prevent
setting changes and ensure security.
System Administrator Login ID ............................................................................................... 249
System Administrator’s Passcode ............................................................................................ 250
Maximum Login Attempts ....................................................................................................... 251

select [System Administrator
Settings].
Procedure" (P.184).
System Administrator Login ID System Settings

8
Set the system administrator UserID. You can enter from 1 to 32 characters.
Note • The default of the system administrator UserID is “11111”.
1 Select [System Administrator Login

ID].
2 Select [On].
3 Select [Keyboard], then in [New
System Administrator Login ID],
enter the system administrator ID
of up to 32 characters, and select
[Save].
249
8 System Settings
4 Select [Keyboard] once more, and in [Re-enter System Administrator Login ID], enter
the same system administrator ID, and select [Save].
5 Select [Save].
6 When a confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
System Administrator’s Passcode

Set the Passcode for System Administration mode.
Setting a Passcode is strongly recommended for security.
Note • The default of the system administrator Passcode is “x-admin”.
The entered Passcode is used to authenticate the system adminiistrator when
[Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [Enabled] for [Login Setup/Auditron
Administration].
After setting the system administrator ID, set the Passcode from 4 to 12 numeric digits.
For information about enabling and disabling Passcodes, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258).
1 Select [System Administrator's

Passcode].
2 Select [Keyboard].
3 Enter the new passcord from 4 to
12 numeric digits in [New
Passcode], and select [Next].
Note • To set no passcord, leave the
passcord blank, and select
[Save].
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to enter the
System Settings
same passcod.
5 Select [Save].
6 When a confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
250
Maximum Login Attempts

This feature protects the settings from being changed by an outsider pretending a
system administrator. If system administrator ID authentication fails repeatedly, you
can set a limit beyond which further tries are not allowed.
You can set the number of authentication attempts allowed, from 1 to 10.
Note • The count is reset when the machine is restarted.
• To chancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by turning off and on the power.
1 Select [Maximum Login Attempts].

2 Select [On].
3 With [ ] and [ ], set the number
of authentication attempts allowed.
4 Select [Save].
System Settings
8
251
8 System Settings
In [Login Setup/Auditron Administration], to prevent unauthorized users from accessing

the machine, you can set different restrictions for each user, or limit the number of
pages each user can produce.
When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, each user of the
machine must enter a UserID and Passcode, thus providing administrative control and
accounting for the machine.
Create/Check User Accounts ....................................................................................................253
Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................256
System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)..............................................................................257
User Details Setup.....................................................................................................................257
Passcode Entry from Control Panel ..........................................................................................258
Login Setup/Auditron Mode .....................................................................................................258

select [Login Setup/Auditron
Administration].
Procedure" (P.184).
System Settings
252
Create/Check User Accounts

When the login setup/Auditron administration feature is enabled, in order to carry out
authentication of registered users, the UserIDs and user names are registered.
For each user of the machine, you can control the use of output color, or set a limit on
the number of pages. For each registered user, you can also check the cumulative
number of pages. Up to 1,000 sets of user data can be registered.
Important • Before registering users, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258) to set the Login
Setup/Auditron Administration mode you use.
1 Select [Create/Check User

Accounts].
2 Select the [No.] for which you want
to register a user, and select
[Create/Delete].
Note • [No.] is a user control number.
• By entering a 4-digit UserID
with the numeric keypad, you
can specify the user directly.
3 Select any item, and set it.

4 Select [Save].
System Settings
UserID
You can enter up to 32 characters for a UserID to use the machine.
8
User Name
Set the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Passcode
Set the Passcode. Setting a Passcode is strongly recommended for security. You can
set the Passcode to from 4 to 12 digits.
253
8 System Settings
Account Limit
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of
the copy, scan, and print features.
1 Select [Account Limit].

2 Select [Copy Service] or [Scan
Service].
3 To place restrictions on a color
mode or feature, select [Feature
Access], and select the item.
4 To set [Account Limit], select
[Account Limit], then with the
numeric keypad enter the
maximum number of pages.
Note • Selecting [Next] causes the
input to switch to the next
item.
Feature Access
Place access restrictions on color modes and features.
z Free Access
The feature is not restricted.
z Black Only
Only monochrome can be used.
z
Color Only
Only color can be used.
z No Access to Copy Service
System Settings
Disables the copy feature.
Account xxxx - Copy Limit

Set the maximum number of pages that can be used in a copy or scan.
z
Color
You can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.
8 z
Black
You can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.
254
Reset Total Impressions

Reset the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.
1 Select [Reset Total Impressions].
Yes
Resets the current cumulative
number of pages for users. Once
reset, the previous count cannot be
restored.
No
Cancels resetting the cumulative
number of pages.
Reset Account
Deletes all registered information for the selected user.
1 Select [Reset Account].
System Settings
Yes
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.
If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left
remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time. 8
No
Cancels the deletion of the user data.
255
8 System Settings
Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation,
or reset the auditron. You can print a report prior to deleting or resetting user accounts
to confirm the contents.
1 Select [Reset User Accounts].

2 When printing an auditron report
for all services, select [Print the
Auditron Report].
3 Select the item to delete or reset,

and select [Reset].
4 Select [Yes] or [No].
All User Accounts

Deletes all registered information
for each user. It also deletes all data
including the maximum number of
pages, cumulative number of
pages, output color restrictions,
printer auditron, and so on.
System Settings
Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and

documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is owner of a large
amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left remaining within a mailbox for
example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
All Feature Access Settings

Resets the feature access limit for all users.
8 All Account Limits

Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).
Total Impressions
Resets all Auditron administration data for all users including the system administrator.
The number of pages is also reset to 0.
Print the Auditron Report

An auditron report of all services is printed.
Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.
256
System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)

You can check or reset the cumulative number of pages copied using the System
Administration mode on the screen.
The cumulative number of pages is counted up to 9,999,999 pages for both color and
monochrome.
1 Select [System Administrator's

Meter (Copy Jobs)].
2 This checks the cumulative number
of pages.
3 To reset, select [Reset].
User Details Setup

Set the information required when carrying out authentication.
1 Select [User Details Setup].

2 Select any item, and set it.
3 Select [Save].
User ID Characters
System Settings
If required, you can change the
indication that appears as UserID
on the [System Administrator Login]
screen when the <Log In/Out>
button on the control panel is
pressed to such as “User Name” or
“Number”. The alias can be set to 1
to 15 characters.
Note • The value is also reflected in report/list displays.
8
Hide User ID (***)
You can set the way in which the UserID is shown as it is being input. Use this feature
to strengthen security as required.
Show
As you enter the UserID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
Hide
As you enter the UserID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
257
8 System Settings
Failed Access Log

In order to detect unauthorized access, if the number of times that authentication fails
within a set time exceeds the [Failed Attempts] value set here, then an error is logged.
1 Select [Failed Access Log].

2 Select [On], and with the numeric
keypad enter the number of
failures.
Passcode Entry from Control Panel

Set whether a Passcode is required when the system administrator or a user is using
the machine.
Select [On] to enable "System Administrator’s Passcode" (P.250), and "Passcode"
(P.253) for [Create/Check User Account].
Select [Off] to not require the Passcode, even if a Passcode is set in the above
procedures.
Important • The setting of [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is used for verification on the machine. A
Passcode must always be input when accessing from remote devices, regardless of the use
of Passcode setting. Depending on verification procedures, a Passcode may be required for
other processes as well.
System Settings
Login Setup/Auditron Mode

Set whether the Auditron administration feature is enabled or not, and whether to
request an authentication operation.
1 Select [Login Setup/Auditron

Mode].
8 2 Select any item.
Off
No user login setup/auditron administration is required to operate the machine.
Note • When [Off] is selected, [Auditron Mode] is disabled even if it is set to [On].
Local Machine Access

The Auditron administration is carried out using the authenticated users already
registered on the machine.
258
For information about authentication on the machine, refer to "Authentication and Auditron
Administration" (P.284).
Auditron Mode
Select whether to use the Auditron administration feature when using the copy, scan,
and print services. Note that Login Setup/Auditron Administration cannot be used
unless the system administrator UserID is set.
For information about the items you can manage, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration"
(P.284).
Note • The items appearing depend on the services provided.
1 Select [Auditron Mode].

2 For the services for which you want
to enable the administration
feature, select [On].
Copy Service
Administration relating to copy
operations.
System Settings
8
259
9 Job Status
This chapter describes the job status features.

z Job Status Overview.................................................................................262
z Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................263
z Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................264
z Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................265
9 Job Status
Job Status Overview
With the job status features, you can check current or pending jobs, and check on
completed jobs. You can also cancel printing, or preferentially print pending print jobs.
1 Press the <Job Status>button.
<Job Status>
button
In the [Job Status] screen, you can do the following.
Checking Jobs
You can check lists of current and pending jobs, and display more details. You can also
cancel an current or pending job.
For details, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.263).
Checking the Status of Completed Jobs

You can display the status of completed jobs. You can also display more details.
For details, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.264).
Job Status
262
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. In the status screen, you
can cancel jobs or preferentially execute jobs.

2 Check the current/pending job.
Display Time
The estimated job completion time is displayed. The time is displayed either in the form
of Cumulative Time Required or Time Required.
Note • The estimated job completion time is not displayed during date processing.
The information to displayed can be changed. For more information about the settings, refer to
"Estimated Time for Single or All Jobs" (P.276)
3 To cancel or preferentially execute a job, select the job.

4 Select [Stop].
Stop
Cancels the executing or pending job.
Job Status
263
9 Job Status
Checking Completed Jobs
This section describes how to check completed jobs.

You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can display
more details by selecting a job.

2 Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.
3 To check the details of a job, select

the job.
After checking, select [Close].
Group Parent Jobs

Allows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).
Job Status
Job Report
Prints a job status information report.
264
Handling Error Terminations
Handling Error Terminations
This section describes how to handle error terminations.
For a Print Job

When selecting a job whose [Status] is [Completed - Error] in the [Completed Jobs]
screen, the error code of the job is displayed in [Status] field. Respond appropriately to
the error code.
For information about error codes, refer to "Error Codes" (P.334).
For Other Jobs

Print a job status/activity report, and check the execution results.
For information about job status/activity reports, refer to "Job Status" (P.275).
Job Status
265
10 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
z Overview of Machine Status .....................................................................268
z Machine Status .........................................................................................269
z Billing Meter/Print Report..........................................................................272
z Supplies ....................................................................................................278
z
Faults ........................................................................................................279
10 Machine Status
Overview of Machine Status
You can check the machine status and number of printed pages in the screen. You can
also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.
1 Press the <Machine Status>

button.
<Machine
Status> button
In the [Machine Status] screen, you can do the following.
Machine Status Check

You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting
status. You can also change and register settings of the print mode.
For more information, refer to "Machine Status" (P.269).
Meter Check and Report Output

You can check the number of pages printed for each meter or for each user. You can
also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.
For more information, refer to "Billing Meter/Print Report" (P.272).
Consumable Check
You can check the status of supplies.
For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.278).
Fault Check
You can check the faults that have occurred in the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.279).
Machine Status
10
268
Machine Status
Machine Status
In the [Machine Status] screen, you can check the machine configuration and the paper
tray status. You can also set the print mode.
Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Machine Status] screen.
Machine Information................................................................................................................ 269
Paper Tray ................................................................................................................................ 271
Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 271

button.
2 In the [Machine Status] screen
displayed, you can check the
machine status.
Machine Information
In the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the serial number, machine
configuration, and software version.
1 Select [Machine Information].

2 In the [Machine Information] screen
displayed, you can check the
machine information.
Machine Status
For enquiry on maintenance and operation

This indicates how to make maintenance and operating inquiries.
Serial Number
10
This indicates the serial number of the machine.
Machine Configuration
The [Machine Configuration] screen is displayed.
Refer to"[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.270).
Software Version
The [Software Version] screen is displayed.
Refer to"[Software Version] Screen" (P.270).
269
10 Machine Status
[Machine Configuration] Screen

You can check the machine configuration.
1 Select [Machine Configuration].

2 In the [Machine Configuration]
screen displayed, you can check
the machine configuration.
In the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items.
z
Configuration Code z
Offset Stacking Module z
Hard Disk
z Auto Document Feeder z Output Device z Page Memory Size
z Paper Tray z Folder z System Memory Size
z High Capacity Feeder z Booklet Maker z Network Controller
z Separators/Covers Tray
Note • [Output Device] indicates whether the finisher (optional) is installed or not. [Finisher] appears
when the finisher is installed.
[Software Version] Screen

You can check the software version.
1 Select [Software Version].

2 In the [Software Version] screen displayed, you can check the machine software
version.
Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.
Machine Status
In the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items.
z
Controller ROM z
IIT ROM
z IOT ROM z IIT Option ROM
z HCF ROM z ADF ROM
z Finisher C ROM z SJFI
10 z Finisher D ROM
270
Machine Status
Paper Tray
You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the
following items.
z
Tray status
z Amount of paper remaining
z Paper size
z Paper type
1 Select [Paper Tray].

2 In the [Paper Tray] screen
displayed, you can check the tray
status for each paper tray.
Overwrite Hard Disk

You can check overwriting status of the hard disk. The "Standby" status indicates the
completion of the overwriting process.
Note • For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears only when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is set for [System Settings].
For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.221).
1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

2 In the [Overwrite Hard Disk] screen
displayed, you can check
overwriting status of the hard disk.
Machine Status
10
271
10 Machine Status
Billing Meter/Print Report
In the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen, you can check the number of pages printed
for each meter, or for each user. You can also print a report/list to check the job history
and set/recorded values.
Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.
Billing Meter .............................................................................................................................272
User Account Billing Meter......................................................................................................273
Print Report/List........................................................................................................................275
Billing Meter
You can confirm the total number of printed pages by individual meters. The meters are
classified by color mode.

button.
2 Select the [Billing Meter/Print
Report] tab.
Note • When [Print Report Button] is

disabled in the Reports
setting, the [Billing Meter] tab
is not displayed.
For the Reports setting, refer
to "Reports" (P.214).
3 Select the [Billing Meter].

4 In the screen displayed, you can
check the meter readings.
Machine Status
10 Serial Number
Displays the Serial Number of the machine.
Meter 1
Number of full color copies and Number of full color prints
Meter 2
Number of B/W copies and Number of B/W prints
Meter 3
Number of large-size full color copies and Number of large-size full color prints
272
Note • Large-size full color is counted as a print at either of number of full color copies or number of
full color prints in meter 1 if a copy or print is made on paper of 279 mm × 400 mm or larger
(279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the secondary
scanning direction) when the user has selected color (4-color or 3-color) for copying or
printing or a color document has been recognized during document scanning on the
scanner.
Meter 4
Number of large-size B/W copies and Number of large-size B/W prints
Meter 5
Meter 1 and Meter 2
User Account Billing Meter

You can check the number of pages printed in monochrome and colors by each user.
When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, you can check the
billing meter for the currently authenticated UserID.
For information about the login setup/auditron administration feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron
Mode" (P.258).
To Check the Billing Meter for the Currently Authenticated UserID
1) Enter the UserID for a user you want to check the billing meter, using the numeric
Machine Status
keypad or the keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].
Note • If a Passcode is required, enter the Passcode.
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.

3) Proceed to Step 2.
10
273
10 Machine Status
To Check the System Administrator Meter

1) Enter the administrator UserID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].
Note • If a Passcode is required, enter the Passcode.
2) Select [User Mode].

3) Press the <Machine Status>
button.
4) Proceed to Step 2.

Report] tab.
3 Select [User Account Billing Meter].
4 Select the meter you want to check.
Meter (Copy Meter)

Machine Status
This shows the number of pages copied.
10
274
Print Report/List
This section describes how to print a report/list.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.

button.
Report] tab.
3 Select [Print Report/List].

Note • The image shown right is the
menu displayed by selecting
[User Mode] in the System
Administration mode.
Job Status
1 Select the [Job Status] tab.

2 Select the report/list to be output.
3 Press the <Start> button. Machine Status
Job History Report

You can check job results. The data
for the latest 200 jobs is printed. 10
Select [All Jobs], [All Printing Jobs],
[All Non-printing Jobs], or [Mailbox
Transfer Jobs].
You can also automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.
For the Auto Print setting, refer to "Reports" (P.214). The Auto Print feature prints the results of all jobs.
Error History Report

You can print error information about the machine. The latest 50 errors are printed.
275
10 Machine Status
Copy Mode Settings
1 Select [Copy Mode Settings].

2 Select [Settings List - Common
Items].
Settings List - Common Items

You can check the hardware
configuration, network information,
and print and copy settings of the
machine.
Note • The same [Settings List] is
printed from [Copy Mode Settings] and [Scan Mode Settings].
Scan Mode Settings
1 Select [Scan Mode Settings].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.
Settings List - Common Items

You can check the hardware
configuration, network information,
and print and copy settings of the
machine.
Note • The same [Settings List] is
printed from [Copy Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], and [Scan Mode Settings].
Extended Features Settings List

You can check the settings of scan features.
Machine Status
Network Controller Jobs Report
1 Select [Network Controller Jobs

Report].
2 Select the report/list to be printed.
10 3 Press the <Start> button.

Note • The items displayed depend
on the options that are
installed.
Job History Report

You can check job results of the Network Controller.
Error History Report
276
You can print error information about the Network Controller.
Fonts List
This prints the fonts available for PostScript.
System Settings List

You can check the network information, and print and scan settings of the Network
Controller.
Job Counter Report

This prints the counter report for each feature.
Note • [Job Counter Report] appears when entered from the [User Mode] of System Administration
mode.
1 Select [Job Counter Report].

2 Select [Job Counter Report].
Machine Status
10
277
10 Machine Status
Supplies
You can check the status of supplies (consumables) in the [Supplies] screen. The
status of supplies is shown as "Ready", "Replace Soon", or "Replace Now". For toner,
the amount is shown in percentage (0 to 100%).
The following describes the procedure for checking the status of supplies.
For information about how to replace supplies, refer to "Troubleshooting" (P.318).

button.
2 Select the [Supplies] tab.
On the [Supplies] screen, you can check the following items.

Note • The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
• Staple Cartridge is displayed when one of the following options is installed: B-Finisher, C-
Finisher, and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.
• Punch Scrap Container is displayed when one of the following options is installed: C-
Finisher and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.
• Booklet Staple Cartridge is displayed when C-Finisher is installed.
z Yellow Toner (Y) z Drum Cartridge (R2)

z
Magenta Toner (M) z
Drum Cartridge (R1)
z Cyan Toner (C) z Waste Toner Container
z Black Toner (K1) z Staple Cartridge (R1)
Machine Status
z Black Toner (K2) z Booklet Staple Cartridge (R2)

z Drum Cartridge (R4) z Booklet Staple Cartridge (R3)
z
Drum Cartridge (R3) z
Hole Punch Container (R4)
Important • If using a partly consumed toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge removed from another
10
DocuColor 6075II/5065II unit), the indicated status may not match the actual remaining
amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new ones.
278
Faults
Faults
This section describes how to check the information of faults occurring in the machine.
The [Error History Report] shows the latest 50 faults. The items displayed include the
date and time, error code, and error category.
This section describes how to print the error history.

button.
2 Select the [Faults] tab.
3 Select [Error History Report].
Note • You can also access the
[Error History Report] from
[Job Status/Activity Report] in
the [Billing Meter/Print Report]
screen.
disabled in the Reports setting, [Error History Report] is not displayed.
For the Reports setting, refer to "Reports" (P.214).
Machine Status
10
279
11 Authentication and Auditron
Administration
The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use
functions, and an Auditron Administration feature that manages the use of each
machine feature.
z Overview of Authentication .......................................................................282
z
Overview of Auditron Administration.........................................................284
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Overview of Authentication
This section describes the Authentication features used with the machine.
Users Controlled by Authentication

The following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the
Authentication feature.
Users are classified into the following four types. The authentication feature restricts
operations according to the user type.
z
System administrator
11 Authentication registered user

z
z Authentication unregistered user

z General users
System Administrators
These are users who can enter and change system settings.
A system administrator uses a special UserID called a System Administrator ID.
To enter the System Administration mode, enter the System Administrator ID into the
UserID entry field on the authentication screen.
Authenticated Users
These are users who are registered with the machine.
When an authenticated user uses a service that is restricted, the user must enter their
UserID on the authentication screen.
Unauthenticated Users
These are users who are not registered with the machine.
An unauthenticated user cannot use services that are restricted.
General Users
These are general users who are not permitted to use the machine in the authenticated
mode.
Types of Authentication
This section describes an overview of the Authentication features that can be used with
the machine.
Authentication is carried out using a UserID or a UserID registered on a remote
accounting server.
The following shows the three different authentication methods according to the
registration of the user information.
Direct Authentication
Uses the user information stored in the machine to manage authentication.
282
Overview of Authentication
Features Controlled by Authentication

This section describes the features of the machine that is controlled by using the
Authentication feature.
Local Access
Local access refers to using the machine by direct operation of the control panel on the
machine.
The following features are controlled by local access.
Copy
Copy operations can be restricted.
When copy operations are registered in job memory,the use of the job memory is also
11
restricted.
283
Overview of Auditron Administration
This section describes an overview of the Auditron Administration features that can be
used with the machine.

The machine uses the Auditron Administration feature together with the Authentication
feature.
Using Authentication on this Unit

Auditron administration is carried out using authentication registered user information
11 already registered on the machine. Also, for print data sent directly from a computer,
the authentication information set in the client side driver is checked against the
authentication information registered on the machine before the data is accepted on
the machine.
Manageable Features and Services

This section describes features and services that can be managed with the Auditron
Administration feature.
Features that can be Managed with Authentication and Corresponding Services

For information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258).
Local Machine Access

The Features and services that can be managed by Local Machine Access are as
follows.
Authentica-
Restrictions on Use
Corresponding tion *1 Per-user
Service Feature Account Limit Usage Count
UserID
restrictions *2 *3
Copy O O O O
Report/List - - - -
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).
*3 This feature stops further machine operation if the number of pages has reached the specified maximum number.
For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).
284
12 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace supplies (consumables), clean the

machine, perform calibration, and print a report/list.
z Replacing Supplies ...................................................................................286
z Cleaning the Machine ...............................................................................307
z Executing Calibration................................................................................310
z Printing a Report/List ................................................................................315
12 Maintenance
Replacing Supplies
The machine is provided with the following supplies and periodical replacement parts. We
recommend using the following supplies and periodical replacement parts because they
have been made according to standards that match the specifications of the machine.
Type of supplies/
Product code Qty/Box
Periodical replacement part
Toner cartridge [Y] CT200571 1 item / 1 box
Toner cartridge [M] CT200570 1 item / 1 box
Maintenance
Toner cartridge [C] CT200569 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [K] CT200568 1 item / 1 box
Drum Cartridge K [R1] (Black) CT350361 1 item / 1 box
Drum Cartridge Y,M,C [R2/R3/R4] (Color) CT350362 1 item / 1 box
12 Waste toner container

Staples Type XE (3PCS)
CWAA0663
CWAA0540
1 unit / 1 box
5000 staples x 3 sets /
1 box
Staples Type XC (4PCS) CWAA0501 5000 staples x 4 sets /
1 box
Staples Type XF (4PCS) CWAA0677 5000 staples x 4 sets,
Staple scrap container x
1 unit / 1 box
Handling Supplies/Periodical Replacement Parts

z
Do not store boxes for supplies/periodical replacement parts upright.
z
Do not unpack supplies/periodical replacement parts until they are to be used. Avoid
storing supplies/periodical replacement parts in the following locations:
- Hot and humid location
- Location close to a fire
- Location exposed to direct sunlight
- Dusty location
z Before using supplies/periodical replacement parts, carefully read the instructions
and precautions on the packaging.
z
We recommend having spare supplies/periodical replacement parts ready.
z
Check the product code of the supplies/periodical replacement parts and contact our
Customer Support Center to place your orders.
z
The use of toner cartridges, waste toner containers, or staple cartridges not
recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner
cartridges, waste toner containers, and staple cartridges recommended by Xerox for
the machine.
Confirming Status of Supplies

The status of supplies can be confirmed on the [Supplies] screen.
The status is indicated by “Ready”, “Order New”, “Replace Now”, or other indications.
Also, an indication from 0 to 100% displays the remaining amount of toner.
For information about confirming supplies, refer to "Supplies" (P.278).
286
Replacing Supplies
Replacing Toner Cartridges

When it is time to replace a toner, a message appears on the touch screen.
If you continue copying or printing without replacing the toner cartridge, a message
appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 1,800 pages for Black
(K), or around 1200 pages for Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).
Toner cartridges can be replaced, even if the machine is operating.
Note • The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used. The number of pages that you can
copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the content,
paper size or orientation, paper type, and the computer environment.
WARNING
Maintenance
z
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner
for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and
cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
12
z
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.

If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative for its disposal.
CAUTION
z
Keep the toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a
physician immediately.
z When replacing the toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any
toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.
z
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with
water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water
and consult a physician immediately.
Important • When replacing toner cartridges, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
• Used toner cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.
• When only a small amount of toner remains in a toner cartridge, the machine may stop
during printing and display a message. If this happens, replace the toner cartridge to
continue copying or printing.
• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
• If a partially used toner cartridge is used, the number of pages that you can copy or print
after the message "Please order xxx toner." appears may vary considerably depending on
the condition.
Note • Monochrome copying and printing is available even when color toners are run out. In this
case, only plain paper can be used.
287
12 Maintenance
1 Open the toner cover.
2 Hold the handle of the toner

cartridge indicated in the message
Maintenance
and gently pull it out.

Note • “Y” is for yellow, “M” is for
magenta, “C” is for cyan, and
“K” is for black.
12
3 Remove the toner cartridge by
holding the handle on the top of the
cartridge while gently pulling it out.
WARNING
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative for its disposal.
Important • Pull out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may fly out of the cartridge.
• Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal.
4 Take out the new toner cartridge of

the same color as the old one from
its box, and gently tilt the cartridge
up and down, and then left and
right several times.
288
Replacing Supplies
5 Insert the toner cartridge in gently

Note • Be sure to insert the toner
cartridge until you hear it click
into place.
6 Close the toner cover.
Maintenance
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is not
completely closed.
Replacing the Waste Toner Container

When the waste toner container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen.
If you continue copying or printing without replacing the waste toner container, a
12
message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 3,000 pages.
Important • When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend
laying paper on the floor beforehand.
• Used waste toner containers require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Xerox for the machine.
• Replace the waste toner container while the machine is on.
Note • The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.
• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on
conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.
1 Make sure that the machine has

stopped before opening the front
cover.
2 Open the waste toner container

cover.
289
12 Maintenance
3 Pull out the waste toner container

about half of it.
4 Hold the center part on the top of

the container, and then remove it.
Maintenance
12
5 Securely hold the used waste toner
container with both hands and put it
into the plastic bag provided with
the new waste toner container.
Important • Return used waste toner
containers to our Customer
Support Center for disposal.
• Be sure to put the used waste
toner container in the
dedicated plastic bag supplied
with the new waste toner
container.
6 Hold the center part on the top of a

new container and insert it until it
comes to a stop.
Important • When inserting the waste
toner container, do not grip
the handle of the container.
7 Close the waste toner container cover.

8 Close the front cover.
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even
slightly open.
290
Replacing Supplies
Replacing Drum Cartridge R1

(for customers having a spot maintenance contract)
When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge
R1”appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer
Support Center.
If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm
the indicated drum cartridge position (R1) and replace the drum cartridge.
If you continue to use the machine without replacing the drum cartridge after the
message appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be
possible once the following number of pages have been copied or printed.
For DocuColor 6075II: Approx. 8,400 pages
Maintenance
z
z
Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from
our customer engineer.
• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes
after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate 12
when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.
• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.
Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all
information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.
• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge R1” appears, image quality of printed
documents or copies may deteriorate.
1 Take out a new drum cartridge and

a black sheet from its container.
Important • Put the drum cartridge on a
flat place.
• Do not place the new drum
cartridge in an upright
position.

cover.
291
12 Maintenance
3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.
4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull

out it.
Maintenance
12
5 Place a black sheet supplied with
the new drum cartridge onto the
unit other than the drum cartridge
R1.
Important • Make sure to place the black
sheet. It may affect image
quality.
6 Remove the drum cartridge upward

while holding rings provided at the
both ends of the drum cartridge.
7 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.

8 Open a bag including a new drum
cartridge and take it out.
Important • Do not touch or scratch the
surface of the drum when you
take it out from the bag.
292
Replacing Supplies
9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum

cartridge and place it under the
cartridge.
10 Grip rings provided at the both

ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.
Maintenance
Important • Do not touch the surface of
the drum cartridge.
12
11 Place the drum cartridge along with
the guide with the side marked with
( ) frontward.
12 Press the both ends of the drum

cartridge to place it in a horizontal
position.
Note • Make sure that the marks
( ) and ( ) face each
other.
13 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

14 Insert the unit completely (1) and
return the handle to the original 2
position (2).
293
12 Maintenance
15 Return the lever R1-R4 to the

original position.

Maintenance
slightly open.
Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4

(for customers having a spot maintenance contract)
12 When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge
RX” appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer
Support Center.
If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm
the indicated drum cartridge position (R2, R3, or R4) and replace the corresponding
drum cartridge.
If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge after the message
appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once
the following number of pages have been copied or printed.
z
z For DocuColor 5065II: Approx. 4,600 pages
Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from
our customer engineer.
• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes
after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate
when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.
• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.
Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all
information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.
• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge RX” appears, image quality of printed
documents or copies may deteriorate.
294
Replacing Supplies
1 Take out a new drum cartridge and

a black sheet from its container.
Important • Put the drum cartridge on a
flat place.
• Do not place the new drum
cartridge in an upright
position.

Maintenance
cover.
12
3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.
4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull

out it.
5 Remove the drum cartridge upward

while holding rings provided at the
both ends of the drum cartridge.
Note • The following example shows
how to replace drum R2.
6 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.
295
12 Maintenance
7 Place a black sheet supplied with

the new drum cartridge onto the
unit.
Important • Make sure to place the black
sheet. It may affect image
quality.
8 Open a bag including a new drum

cartridge and take it out.
Maintenance
Important • Do not touch or scratch the

surface of the drum when you
take it out from the bag.
12
9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum
cartridge and place it under the
cartridge.
10 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

11 Grip rings provided at the both
ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.
Important • Do not touch the surface of
the drum cartridge.
12 Place the drum cartridge along with

the guide with the side marked with
( ) frontward.
296
Replacing Supplies
13 Press the both ends of the drum

cartridge to place it in a horizontal
position.
Note • Make sure that the marks ( )
and ( ) face each other.
14 Remove the film on the drum

cartridge.
Maintenance
12
15 Insert the unit completely and
return the handle to the original 2
position.
16 Return the lever R1-R4 to the

original position.

slightly open.
297
12 Maintenance
Replacing the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet

Maker
When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is
time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this
message appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.
The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with
Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the C-Finisher.
Important • The use of staples not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use
only staples recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.
Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.
Maintenance

cover of the finisher.
12
2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple
cartridge holder, and pull out the
holder to the right towards you.
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder

by gripping the orange lever.
Note • The staple cartridge is firmly
held. When remove the staple
cartridge, strongly pull the
cartridge.
4 Pick the empty staple case with 2

your fingers (1), and then remove
the case from the cartridge (2) as 1
shown in the figure.
298
Replacing Supplies
5 Prepare a new staple case. Insert

2
the front of the staple case into the
staple cartridge (1), and push the
rear of the case to set (2).
6 Insert the staple cartridge while

gripping the orange lever until you
Maintenance
hear it click into place.
12
7 Close the front cover of the finisher.
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher
is even slightly open.
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker
or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) or the D2-Finisher with Booklet
Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the booklet staple cartridge, a
message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, replace the
booklet staple cartridge with a new one.
This section explains how to replace the booklet staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with
Booklet Maker. Use the same procedures for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

299
12 Maintenance
2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the

right (1), and pull out the unit (2).
R3
R2
3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple

cartridge, and then lift to remove it.
Maintenance
12
4 Holding the tabs of a new booklet
staple cartridge, return the
cartridge to the original position
and gently push it until you hear it
click into place.
5 Return the unit to its original

position.

300
Replacing Supplies
Replacing the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

When the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace
the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message
appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

stopped, and open the right cover
of the finisher.
Maintenance
2 Hold the R1 at the position shown 12
in the diagram.
3 Pull out the unit.
4 Hold the positions indicated by an

arrow to remove the staple
cartridge from the unit.
301
12 Maintenance
5 Push a new staple cartridge into

the unit.
6 Push the removed unit back to the

original position.
Maintenance
12
7 Close the right cover of the finisher.
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will operate unless the right cover of the
finisher is completely closed.
302
Replacing Supplies
Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with

Booklet Maker
When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the
punch scrap container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Discard
the scraps according to the message.
When pulling the punch scrap container out to dispose the punch scraps, ensure that
all scraps are discarded. If there are scraps remaining, the container may be full before
the next message is displayed. It may cause machine malfunctions.
Important • Pull the container out while the power is on. If you switch off the power when emptying the
Maintenance
scrap container, the machine will not be able to detect that the scraps have been disposed.

12
2 Pull out the punch scrap container

R4.
3 Discard all the scraps.
4 Insert the empty punch scrap

container until it comes to a stop.
303
12 Maintenance
Emptying the Punch Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
When the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the punch scrap
container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Discard the scraps
according to the message.
If you take the punch scrap container out of the machine, make sure to empty it
completely. If it is reinstalled with some scraps remaining, it may become full before the
message appears again, and this can cause machine breakdown.
Maintenance
Important • When emptying the punch scrap container, make sure that the machine is switched on. If not
switched on, the machine will not recognize that the punch scrap container has been
emptied.

12 of the finisher.
2 Pull out the punch scrap container

R4 towards you.
3 Discard all the scraps.
4 Insert the empty punch scrap

container into its original position
304
Replacing Supplies
Replacing the Staple Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
When the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed and the staple scrap container
becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Replace the staple scrap
container according to the message.
Important • Replace the staple scrap container while the power is on.
• A Staple scrap container is included in a Staples Type XF (4PCS).
Maintenance
CAUTION
Be careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching a staple dust box.

12
of the finisher.
2 Move the lock lever, shown in the

diagram, leftward to the position.
3 Securely hold the staple scrap

container by its R5 section, and
take the container out of the
machine.
305
12 Maintenance
4 Put the old container into the

plastic bag supplied.
Important • Do not disassemble the
container and return it to our
5 Hold a new staple scrap container

by its R5 section, and insert the
Maintenance
container, bottom first, into the

machine.
Important • To prevent injury, do not put
your fingers on top of the
container.
12
6 Push the R5 section of the
container until the lock lever moves
to the position.

306
Cleaning the Machine
The following describes how to clean the machine.

This section is divided into separate descriptions on how to clean the exterior,
document cover/document feeder, and document glass.
WARNING
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it.
Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use
Maintenance
aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.
CAUTION
When cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch
circuit). Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock. 12
Cleaning the Exterior
The following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the
machine as doing so may discolor, deform, or crack covers.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying.
1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly

wrung soft cloth moistened with
water.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt,
try gently wiping with a soft
cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
2 Wipe off any excess water from the exterior with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass

If the document cover and document glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the
machine may not properly detect document sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint
or coating on plastic parts.
307
12 Maintenance
1 Wipe the document cover with a

soft cloth moistened with water to
remove any dirt and then wipe it
with a soft, dry cloth.
2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt
and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Maintenance
Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount
of neutral detergent.
Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass

12 If the film section and document feeder glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month or clean it
when a message is shown on the display.
1 Wipe the film section and the

document feeder glass and guide
with a soft cloth moistened with
water to remove any dirt on the
document cover, glass and guide,
and then wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth.
2 Holds the green lever to open the

part of the figure on the right. Wipe
the optical glass with a soft cloth
moistened with water to remove
any dirt on the optical glass, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not push the optical glass
strongly since it is easy to
damage the film around the
optical glass surface.
Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount
of neutral detergent.
3 Close the cover until it clicks into place by pushing the center part of the left edge of
the cover.
308
Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers

If the machine is equipped with a document feeder and the document feeder rollers are
dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect document
sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month.
malfunction or damage documents during copying or printing.
1 Pull up the handle of the top cover
Maintenance
of the document feeder, and open
the top cover until it comes to a
stop.
Note • When you fully open the
cover, it enters a fixed
position. Open the cover
gently.
12
2 While turning the rollers, gently
clean it with a soft cloth moistened
with water.
Important • Use a cloth that has been
firmly wrung to prevent drops
of water falling into the
machine. Drops of water on
internal components may
cause a malfunction.
try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.
3 Close the top cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.
4 Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.
309
12 Maintenance
Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically adjust gradation when the reproducibility of density or
color in copies and prints has deteriorated. The machine can adjust the gradation for
each screen type.
The following three types of screen is available.
z
Copy Job
Adjusts the gradation for copying documents.
z Print Job 1
Maintenance
Basic screen for printing.

Adjusts the gradation for items other than [Graphic] and [Presentation] of [Color
Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.
12 Adjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.
z
Print Job 2
Adjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.
Adjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.
The following paper sizes is available for the calibration: A3, A4 , 11 x 17 inches, and
8.5 x 11 inches .
Note • We recommend executing calibration for all three of the screen types. When the adjustment
for one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.
• If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of calibration, contact
• The calibration does not execute when [Text] or [Map] is selected for [Original Type] in the
[Image Quality] tab for copying.
• To make sure that [Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode is set as following
before executing calibration:
Lighten/Darken: Normal, Color Shift: Normal, Color Saturation: Normal, Color Balance: 0.
• After finishing the calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For
information about the [Copy Default], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.226).
<Log In/Out>
button
310

keypad or a keyboard displayed by
[Confirm].
admin”.
Maintenance
12
311
12 Maintenance
6 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].

Maintenance
7 Select [Calibration].
12
8 Load paper.
malfunctions.
9 Select the screen type for

calibration.
Note • The example described here
is for the [Copy Job] screen.
10 Select the tray that you loaded paper in Step 10 for [Paper Supply], and then select
[Close].
Note • Only paper types can be set when you select the Tray 5 (bypass).
11 Select [Target] to set an area for applying the calibration, and then select [Close].
Note • Normally, select [Copy/Print] for [Applicable Area]. When using external calibration for print
output, set [Applicable Area] if necessary.
12 Select [Start].
Note • The message “Printing the Calibration Chart. Copy Job” appears and the document for
calibration (Calibration Chart) is printed.
312
14 Align the magenta patch of the Magenta

printed Calibration Chart against
Maintenance
the left side of the document glass.
Note • Place the Calibration Chart on
the document glass.
12
15 Place at least five sheets of white
paper on the Calibration Chart to
cover the Chart and close the
document cover.
16 Select [Start].
The message “Calibration is in progress. Copy Job” appears and the machine
automatically adjusts the gradation. It takes about 30 seconds to complete calibration.
If the adjustment completes successfully, a completion message appears on the
[Calibration] screen. If there is a problem, the machine stops adjustment and displays
an error message. Solve the problem in accordance with the displayed error message.
17 Select [Confirm].
18 To continue automatic calibration for other screen types, repeat Steps 11 to 17.
19 When you started the calibration from the [All Services] screen, select [Close] and
then go to Step 22. started the adjustment in the System Administration mode, select
[Close] until the [System Settings] screen appears.
313
12 Maintenance

21 Make a copy to confirm the image quality.
Maintenance
12
314
Printing a Report/List
Printing a Report/List
Printing reports/lists allows you to check the machine configuration and communication
status. This section describes how to print a report/ list.
For information about report/list types, refer to "Print Report/List" (P.275).
Using the [Job status] screen allows you to print the results of completed jobs. Refer to
"Checking Completed Jobs" (P.264).
Note • When the <Job in Memory> indicator is not lit, there is no stored document to print.
Maintenance
button.
<Machine
Status> button
12
Report] tab.
3 Select [Print Report/List].
disabled in [Reports], [Print
Report/List] appears only
during normal operation in the
System Administration mode.
For [Reports], refer to
"Reports" (P.214).
4 Select a report or list you want to

print and press the <Start> button.
Note • The items displayed differ
depending on the optional
features installed.
315
13 Problem Solving
This chapter describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their
solutions.
z Troubleshooting ........................................................................................318
z Machine Trouble .......................................................................................320
z Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................324
z Trouble during Copying ............................................................................329
z
Error Codes ..............................................................................................334
z Paper Jams...............................................................................................344
z
Document Jams........................................................................................381
z
Stapler Faults............................................................................................384
13 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
See the following for troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems.
Power is not switched On. Cause Is the power switch on the machine off?
No Yes Action Turn the power switch on.
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).
No
Cause Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?
Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power
cord. Then turn the power switch on.
Problem Solving

No
Cause Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the rear
of the rack?
Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power
cord. Then turn the power switch on.
13 Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

No
Cause Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?
Action Make sure that the power supply is 220 V (volts), 10 A
(amperes).
Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified
maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2kW) is being
supplied.
Touch screen is dark. Cause Is the <Power Saver> button on?

No Yes Action The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the <Power
Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver
mode.
Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).
No
Cause Is the brightness dial set too low?
Action Use the brightness dial to adjust display brightness.
A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper jam or document jam occurred?

No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.344).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams"
(P.381).
No
Cause An error code displayed?
Action Refer to "Error Codes" (P.334).
The machine is not working Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.320).

properly.
No Yes
318
Troubleshooting
Poor image quality Action Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.324).

No Yes
Trouble during Copy Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.329).
Yes
If the machine has still not worked properly after taking measures described in this
chapter, contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving
13
319
13 Problem Solving
Machine Trouble
If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again.
Symptoms Check Remedy

Power is not Is the power switch on the Turn the power switch on.
switched On. machine off? Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).
Is the power cord plugged Turn the power switch off and then firmly
into the power outlet? plug in the power cord. Then turn the
power switch on.
Is the power cord
Problem Solving
disconnected from the

machine or the rear of the
rack?
Is power of the correct Make sure that the power supply is 200 V
voltage being supplied? (volts), 15 A (amperes) when one electric
cord is provided.
Make sure that power of capacity
13 compatible with the specified maximum

power consumption of the machine
(2.2kW) is being supplied.
Touch screen is Is the <Power Saver> The machine is in the Power Saver mode.
dark. button on? Press the <Power Saver> button on the
control panel to cancel the Power Saver
mode.
Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).
Is the brightness dial set too Use the brightness dial to adjust display
low? brightness.
unable to copy. Is a message displayed on Follow the instructions displayed to solve
the touch screen? the problem.
Is the power cord plugged Turn the power switch off and then firmly
into the power outlet? plug in the power cord. Then turn the
power switch on.
Printing is not Is paper of the size Follow the instructions displayed to load
performed even specified for printing loaded paper of correct size and instruct it to print
though printing on the tray? again.
was instructed Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5
on Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).
(bypass).
320
Machine Trouble

Copies are not Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
made at the document cover dirty? cover.
desired size Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.307).
Is the document made of Place the document on the document
highly transparent material glass, and place a white sheet on top of the
like a transparency? document before making a copy.
Is the document at the Load the document correctly.
correct position? Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Problem Solving
Is the document guides at Properly set the document guides.
the correct position? Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
Is the document folded or Straighten and properly reset the
bent? document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
Is the document a non- Enter the document size.
standard size? Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan
Size for the Document)" (P.83).
13
321
13 Problem Solving

Paper is often Is paper loaded properly in Load paper correctly.
jammed or the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
wrinkled.
Is the paper tray set Firmly push in the paper tray as far as
properly? possible to set it properly.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream.
Is the paper curled? Either turn the paper so that the curl is
facing down in the paper tray, or replace
with paper from a new ream.
Problem Solving
Are the paper and paper Make sure the paper and paper tray match
tray settings correct? the configured paper size.
Refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.203).
Are there any torn pieces of Open the door of the machine or slide out
paper still remaining inside the paper tray to remove the torn paper or
the machine or is there a the foreign object.
13 foreign object in the
machine?
Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.344), or "Loading
Paper" (P.162).
Is out-of-spec paper loaded Replace with paper that meets machine
in the tray? specifications.
Refer to "Paper Types" (P.158), or "Loading
Paper" (P.162).
Is paper loaded in the paper Load paper in the paper tray so that it does
tray past its maximum fill not exceed the maximum fill line.
line? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
Is the paper guide set Load the paper correctly, and apply the
correctly? paper guides to a paper lightly.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162), or
"Changing the Paper Size for the Trays"
(P.173).
Is the image size on the Increase the amounts of edge erase.
paper is almost the same as For more information, refer to "Edge Erase
the paper size? (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the
Document)" (P.85) when you make copies, or
to the print driver's online help when you print
data.
Is paper cut properly? Some paper are not cut properly
depending on a paper type. Fan the paper
well before loading paper.
Documents are Are the documents too The minimum size of the document that
not fed into the small? can be loaded on the document feeder is
document A5.
feeder. Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
322
Machine Trouble

An error Check the position of the Set the paper guides to the correct
message is paper guides of the Tray 5 positions.
displayed after (bypass). Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5
paper is loaded (Bypass)" (P.166).
in paper Tray 5
(bypass) and the
<Start> button is
pressed.
Documents are Is the right type of document Properly load a document that can be
often jammed. used? handled by the document feeder.
Are you trying to copy Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
irregular shaped
Problem Solving
documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin
documents?
Are you trying to copy Remove sticky labels, paper clips or
documents affixed with adhesive tape from the document before
sticky labels, paper clips or copying.
adhesive tape?
Are the document guides at
the correct position?
Properly set the document guides.
13
Is part of the document Open the document feeder cover and
ripped, and a piece of paper check inside.
remaining in the document Refer to "Document Jams" (P.381).
feeder?
When importing originals of Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
different sizes, is the [Mixed Refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning
Size Originals] setting set to Different Size Documents Simultaneously)"
[On]? (P.84).
Is an A5-size document Load the A5-size document vertically ( ).
loaded horizontally ( ) on
the document feeder when
the Mixed Size Originals
feature is in use?
A corner of the Is the document curled? Flatten out the curl and load the document
document is again.
folded.
Color copies Is [Output Color] set to Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].
cannot be made. [Black]? Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to
Copy)" (P.69).
Is a message prompting Replace with the toner cartridge of the
toner cartridge replacement color indicated in the message.
displayed on the touch Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.287).
screen?
Stapler Faults - Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.384).
323
13 Problem Solving
Image Quality Problems
When image quality of the printed document is poor, choose the similar symptom in the
following table, and perform the required remedy.
If image quality is not improved by applying the relevant remedy, contact our Customer
Support Center.

The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
document cover dirty? cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.307).
Problem Solving
Is the document made of If the document is highly transparent,

highly transparent material marks on the document cover will be
like a transparency? copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the
original document and make a copy.
Is the document colored, of Either adjust the copy density or image
a rough texture or a quality and then retry copying.
blueprint?
13
Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background
Suppression/Contrast)" (P.76), or Passcode.
Are you making copies of Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
glossy printing paper? document glass, and shadows are
sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt.
Place a transparency or highly transparent
film under the document and retry copying.
The copy has Is the scanning glass on the Clean the document feeder glass.
black lines. feeder dirty? Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and
Document Feeder Glass" (P.308).
The copy is too Is the copy density set to Adjust the copy density.
dark. [Dark]? Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the
The copy is too Is the density of the Document Type)" (P.74).
light. document too light?
Is the copy density set to
[Lighter]?
Tonal Is tonal reproduction poor? Perform automatic calibration from the [All
reproduction in Services] screen.
color copies is Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).
poor, resulting in
unsatisfactory
image quality.
The copy shifts Is the paper shifting or is the Align the edges of the paper, and load the
slightly. leading edge of the paper paper again so that is flush against the
not loaded flush with the paper tray corners.
tray corners? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
324

Images on the Is the document loaded Load the document correctly.
copy are correctly? Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).
skewed.
Is paper loaded properly in Load paper correctly.
the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
Is the paper guide of the Load paper correctly.
Tray 5 (bypass) set so that Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5
the guide touches the (Bypass)" (P.166).
paper?
Is the document guides at Load the document correctly, and align the
the correct position? document guides with the edge of the
document.
Problem Solving
Is the paper tray set Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to
properly? set it properly.
Part of the image Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, either some parts of
is missing on the the copy are not shown or the copy is
copy. smudged and unclear. Replace with paper
from a new ream. 13
Is the loaded paper folded Remove the defective paper and replace
or wrinkled? with paper from a new ream.
Is the document pasted A probable cause is that the pasted or
together or folded in? folded in section is curling back, and has
risen up from the surface of the document
glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the
document to hold the document down flat
against the document glass.
A stripe pattern Is too large a copy ratio set? Stripes sometimes appear in copies at
appears in some copy ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.
copies. Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/
Reduced Copies)" (P.63).

Printing is faint. The paper is damp. Replace with paper from a new ream.
(smudged, Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
unclear)
The drum cartridge is Replace with a new drum cartridge.
depleted or damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for
customers having a spot maintenance contract)"
(P.291), or "Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/
R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance
contract)" (P.294).
There is no toner left in the Replace with a new toner cartridge.
toner cartridge. Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.287).
325
13 Problem Solving

Black or colored The drum cartridge is Replace with a new drum cartridge.
dots are printed. depleted or damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for
contract)" (P.294).
Black or colored The drum cartridge is Replace with a new drum cartridge.
lines are printed. depleted or damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for
Problem Solving

contract)" (P.294).
The scanning glass on the Clean the document feeder glass.
document feeder is dirty. Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and
13 Document Feeder Glass" (P.308), or "Cleaning

the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass"
(P.308).
Dirt appears at Dirt on the paper feed path. Print a few pages.
equal intervals.
contract)" (P.294).
White dots The paper in use is Load suitable paper.

appear in black unsuitable. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
filled areas.
contract)" (P.294).
326

Printed toner The paper is damp. Replace with paper from a new ream.
smudges when Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
rubbed with your
finger. The paper in use is Load suitable paper.
Toner is not unsuitable. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
fused to the
paper.
The paper is
dirtied with toner.
Problem Solving
The entire paper The drum cartridge is Replace with a new drum cartridge.
area is printed depleted or damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for
black. customers having a spot maintenance contract)"
13
contract)" (P.294).
A probable cause is a high- Contact our Customer Support Center.
voltage power supply
malfunction.
Nothing is Two or more sheets of Fan the paper well and load it again.
printed. paper are being fed Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
simultaneously (double-
feed).
A probable cause is a high- Contact our Customer Support Center.
voltage power supply
malfunction.
White areas or The paper is damp. Replace with paper from a new ream.
white or colored Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
stripes appear.
The paper in use is Load suitable paper.
unsuitable. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
327
13 Problem Solving

The entire page When the print was made Load paper of the correct size and type into
is printed faint. using the Tray 5 (bypass), the Tray 5 (bypass).
the size and type of the Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5
actually loaded paper (Bypass)" (P.166).
differed from the setting on
the print driver.
Two or more sheets may be Fan the paper well and load it again.
feeding at once. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
Paper becomes The paper in use is Replace with paper from a new ream.
wrinkled. unsuitable. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
Problem Solving
Text is blurred.
Paper is being added while
it is being fed.
The paper is damp.
13
White areas The drum cartridge is Replace with a new drum cartridge.
appear or color is depleted or damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for
missing vertically customers having a spot maintenance contract)"
contract)" (P.294).
Text or images The paper guide in the Set the horizontal and vertical paper
are printed at an paper tray is not set at the guides to the correct positions.
angle correct position. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).
328
Trouble during Copying
Describes solutions for problems encountered during copying.
Unable to Copy
Describes solutions when unable to copy.
Document not fed Cause Document size is too small.
properly from the
document feeder
Action The minimum size of the document that can be loaded
Problem Solving
on the document feeder is A5.
Cause The right type of document is not being used.

Action The document feeder cannot be used with irregular
sized documents, business cards, transparencies, or
thin documents.
In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and
cellophane tape cannot be used.
13
Cause The document guides are in the incorrect position.

Action Set the document guides to correctly match the
document size.
Cause Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper

remaining in the document feeder.
Action Open the document feeder cover, and remove the piece
of paper.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.381).
Cause Documents of different sizes are set.

Action When using documents of different sizes, you must
specify [Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam
will result. When setting documents of different sizes, be
sure to specify [Mixed Size Originals].
Refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size
Documents Simultaneously)" (P.84).
329
13 Problem Solving
The Copy Result is not What was Expected

Described solutions for situations in which the copy result is different from that
expected.
The copy is dirty. Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass"
(P.307).
Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like

a transparency.
Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on the
document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of
Problem Solving
paper on the original document and make a copy.
Cause Color paper, rough paper, or blueprint paper is being

used.
Action The paper's background color is copied. Either adjust
the copy density or image quality, or specify suppress
13 background color, and then retry copying.
Cause Glossy printing paper is being used.

Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document
glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and
reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly
transparent film under the document and retry copying.
Copy is too dark, or too Cause Copy density is set to [Darker], or to [Lighter].
light
No Action Adjust the copy density.
Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)"
(P.74).
Cause Density of the document is too light.

Action Adjust the copy density.
Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)"
(P.74).
Cause The Original Type is inappropriate.

Action Copy black text. If it is too light, select [Text] for [Original
Type].
Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/
Contrast)" (P.76).
Colors differ between Cause Tonal reproduction is misconfigured.

the original and the
copy.
No Action Perform calibration.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).
330
No Cause A document type appropriate for this document is not

selected.
Action In [Original Type], select a type appropriate for the
document.
Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/
Contrast)" (P.76).
The copy shifts slightly. Cause Paper set in the paper tray is misaligned.
No Action Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again
so that is flush against the front tray corners.
Part of the image is Cause The paper is damp.
Problem Solving
missing on the copy.
No Action If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are
not shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace
with paper from a new ream.
Cause Paper with folds or wrinkles has been set in the paper
tray. 13
Action Remove the defective paper and replace with paper
from a new ream.
Cause The document is pasted together or folded in.

Action It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the
document is not touching the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on the document to hold the
document down flat against the document glass.
Stripes appear in the Cause The document enlargement ratio is too large.
copy
No Action Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some
enlargement ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.
Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced
Copies)" (P.63).
Images on the copy are Cause The document is not loaded correctly.
skewed.
No Action Load the document correctly.
Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.

Action Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
331
13 Problem Solving
No Cause The paper tray is not set properly.

Action Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it
properly.
Cause The paper guide for Tray 5 (bypass) is misaligned.

Action Load the paper correctly, and align the paper guide with
the edge of the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).
Copies are not made at Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
the desired size
Problem Solving
No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.

Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass"
(P.307).
Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like

a transparency.
Action Place a white sheet of paper on the original document
13 and make a copy.
Cause The document is misaligned.

Action Load the document correctly.
Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.

Action Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
Cause The document is a non-standard size.
Action Enter the document size and then copy.

Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.83).
Cause The document is folded or bent.

Action Straighten and properly reset the document.
Unable to take color Cause [Output Color] is set to [Black].

copies
No Action Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Full Color].
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)" (P.69).
A corner of the copy is Cause The document exceeds the printable area.
cut off.
No Action Adjust the reduce/enlarge to make the copy a little
smaller.
332
No
No stapling done Cause The finisher is not attached.
Action A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a
finisher, or cancel stapling from the print options.
Cause The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.

Action A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the
number of pages to 50 or lower.
Problem Solving
13
333
13 Problem Solving
Error Codes
This section explains error codes.

If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the
machine, then an error message code (***-***) is displayed.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact our Customer Support Center.
Refer to the following table for error codes, and rectify the problem.
Important • If an error code is displayed, all print data of the machine as well as print data stored in the
machine's built-in memory is discarded.
Problem Solving
Errors are divided into the following [Categories].

C: Copy
P: Print
S: Scan
O: Other Problems
13 Category
Error Code Cause and Remedy
C P S O
002-770 O O [Cause] Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard
disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
003-702 O O [Cause] When making 2 sided copy using the Build Job feature,
the resulted ratio is different between Side 1 and 2.
[Remedy] Match the resulted ratio between Side 1 and 2.
003-750 O [Cause] Unable to store any documents with 2 Sided Book Copy
feature.
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copy settings.
Refer to "2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)"
(P.82).
003-751 O O [Cause] The machine is unable to process size, because the
specified document area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.
003-752 O [Cause] When setting a mixed size document to Full Color/2 Side
and attempting to scan at 600dpi, an error occurs.
[Remedy] Decrease [Scan Resolution] to [400dpi] or less, and
rescan.
003-753 O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided
simultaneous scan feature with 300, 400, or 600dpi, an
error occurs.
rescan.
003-754 O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
003-755 [Remedy] Reprocess the job.
334
Error Codes
Category
C P S O
003-757 O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided
simultaneous scan feature with400, or 600dpi, an error
occurs.
rescan.
003-760 O [Cause] An incompatible combination of features are specified in
the document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Check the selected options.
003-761 O O [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray is
different from the paper size of the tray selected for Auto
Problem Solving
Repeat.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper
Type Priority] settings.
003-763 O [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Adjustment Chart properly on the document
glass.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).
003-795 O [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the
specified paper size, the reduction/enlargement ratio
13
value exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:
z Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
z Change the paper size.
005-274 O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.

005-275 [Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. Contact our Customer
005-280 Support Center.
005-281
005-282
005-283
005-284
005-285
005-286
335
13 Problem Solving
Category
C P S O
012-211 O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.
012-212 [Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved
012-213 by performing the relevant remedy, Contact our
012-214 Customer Support Center.
012-215
012-216
012-217
012-218
012-219
012-221
Problem Solving
012-223
012-224
012-225
012-226
012-227
012-228
012-229
13 012-230
012-235
012-236
012-237
012-238
012-239
012-240
012-241
012-243
012-246 O [Cause] The Booklet Maker is not fully inserted in the C-Finisher
with Booklet Maker.
[Remedy] Fully insert the Booklet Maker, and turn the machine off
and on.
012-247 O [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-248 [Remedy] Turn the machine off and on. If the error persists, contact
012-250 our Customer Support Center.
012-251
012-252
012-253
012-254 O [Cause] The sensor was activated because paper output to the
finisher was removed before the finisher tray lowered and
completely stopped in position. Or, there is a foreign object
under the finisher tray.
[Remedy] If there is any foreign object under the finisher tray, remove
it and then turn the machine off and on. If the error persists,
contact our Customer Support Center.
336
Error Codes
Category
C P S O
012-255 O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.
012-264
012-265
012-266
012-270
012-271
012-282
Problem Solving
012-283
012-284
012-291
012-295
012-296
016-210 O [Cause] An error occurred on the software settings.
016-212
016-213
by performing the relevant remedy, Contact our
Customer Support Center. 13
016-214
016-215
016-216
016-217
016-219 O [Cause] The machine does not have the software license.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved
by performing the relevant remedy, Contact our
016-220 O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document scanner.
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-708 O [Cause] Annotation is not possible due to insufficient hard disk
space.
016-712 O [Cause] The machine is unable to process the job, because the
specified document area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.
016-722 O [Cause] The specified staple position or the specified paper size
is not supported in the finisher.
[Remedy] Check the staple position and the paper size, and try to
print again.
337
13 Problem Solving
Category
C P S O
016-723 O [Cause] The specified punch position or the specified paper size
is not supported in the finisher.
[Remedy] Check the punch position and the paper size, and try to
print again.
016-724 O [Cause] The specified staple and punch position combination is
unsupported.
[Remedy] Specify the staple and punch positions to be on the
same side, and try to print again.
016-735 O O [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the
job template.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a period.

016-748 O O O [Cause] Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk
space.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example,
by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a
time when making multiple copies.
016-756 O [Cause] No permissions to use the service.
13 016-757
[Remedy] Check with your System Administrator.
O [Cause] Passcode is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct Passcode.
016-758 O O O [Cause] No Permissions to use service.
[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.
016-759 O O O [Cause] Maximum number of pages for this service has been
reached.
[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.
016-774 O O [Cause] Compression conversion is not possible due to
insufficient hard disk space.
016-775 O O [Cause] Image conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard
disk space.
016-777 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard
disk, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-778 O [Cause] Conversion processing of scanned image was
interrupted, because of insufficient disk space.
016-779 O [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion
processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning.
016-780 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image
conversion processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard
disk, contact our Customer Support Center.
338
Error Codes
Category
C P S O
016-786 O O [Cause] When using the scan feature, hard disk capacity is
insufficient for writing to a file.
[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.
016-791 O O [Cause] The forwarding destination or job template save location
could not be accessed.
[Remedy] Check whether you can access the specified forwarding
destination.
016-792 O [Cause Specified job history could not be acquired, when
printing [Job Counter Report]
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Specified job history does not exist.
016-793 O [Cause] The hard disk has run out free space.
[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.
021-750 O [Cause] During an inspection or maintenance request, a
021-751 transmission error occurred, and our Customer Support
Center could not be contacted.
13
021-770
021-771 [Remedy] Check that the phone lines are connected, and try
021-772 sending an inspection or maintenance request again
after a short time.
If the error persists, contact our Customer Support
Center.
027-720 O [Cause] Unable to find the server of an application interface
destination.
[Remedy] Check DNS server address. Or check whether an
application interface in installed on the computer is
registered by DNS server or not.
027-721 O [Cause] An application interface destination does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether an application linked operates correctly.
027-722 O [Cause] The jobs was timed out during connection with an
application interface destination.
[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.
027-727 O [Cause] A parameter is illegal during an application interface.
[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.
027-728 O [Cause] The number of files that is required to send to external
services exceeds the maximum number of files that can
be sent.
[Remedy] Try to send again after decreasing the number of pages
that is lower than the maximum number.
027-770 O [Cause] The print data cannot be processed because of PDL
error.
[Remedy] Check the print data and try to print again.
027-771 O [Cause] A disk full error occurred.
047-210 O O [Cause] An error occurred with the offset stacking module.
by performing the relevant remedy, contact our
339
13 Problem Solving
Category
C P S O
062-210 O [Cause] The document feeder malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
062-220 O Refer to 062-210.
062-277 O [Cause] A communications error occurred between the document
scan unit and the document feeder.
Problem Solving

062-790 O [Cause] The scanned document is copy-protected.
[Remedy] Refer to "Legal Notice" (P.29), and check to see if the
document can be copied.
063-210
13
O Refer to 062-211.
063-220 O Refer to 062-210.
063-230
063-240
065-210 O [Cause] An error occurred with the machine.
065-211 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
065-212
065-213
065-215 O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
065-219 O O Refer to 062-210.
065-220
071-210 O [Cause] The Tray 1 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 1, and power-cycle the
machine. If the machine is not improved by performing
the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support
Center. Trays other than the Tray 1 can be used.
340
Error Codes
Category
C P S O
075-210 O [Cause] The Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.
078-250 O [Cause] The Tray 6 (High Capacity) malfunctioned.
Problem Solving
078-260 O [Cause] The Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity Tray) malfunctioned.
078-261 [Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity
078-262 Tray), and power-cycle the machine. If the machine is
078-263 not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact
078-264
078-265
13
078-266
078-267
078-268
078-269
078-270
078-271
078-272
078-273
078-274
078-275
078-276
078-277
078-278
078-279
078-280
078-281
078-282 O [Cause] The Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.
078-283 [Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass), and power-
cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved by
performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer
Support Center.
112-700 O [Cause] The finisher's punch scrap container is full.
[Remedy] Empty the punch scrap container.
For more information, refer to "Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-
Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker" (P.303).
116-701 O O [Cause] 2 sided print could not be made due to insufficient
memory.
[Remedy] Print each side.
116-713 O [Cause] Job was divided and printed due to insufficient disk
space.
341
13 Problem Solving
Category
C P S O
123-400 O [Cause] A malfunction occurred in the machine.
124-705 O [Cause] The settings for punching are cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the punching position and try to print again.
124-706 O [Cause] The settings for folding are cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the folding settings and try to print again.
124-709 O [Cause] The number of pages exceeds the number of pages that
can be stapled.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Decrease the number of pages, or cancel the stapling

settings, then try to print again.
127-210 O [Cause] A malfunction occurred in the machine.
127-212 by performing the relevant remedy, contact our
13 127-220
127-221
127-311
133-700 O [Cause] The staple or punch setting was cancelled.
[Remedy] Check the staple position, and try again.
342
Error Codes
Other Errors
Remedies are described for situations in which the following messages are displayed.
Error Code Category

Cause and Remedy
messages C P S M O
A fault has O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.
occurred. [Remedy] Turn off the power, wait until the touch screen goes dark,
Switch off the and then turn on power again.
machine. (xxx- If the message persists, record the displayed contents
yyy) for [(xxx-yyy)]. Switch off the machine immediately, wait
for the touch screen to go dark, and contact our
Problem Solving
Completed O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.
with an error. [Remedy] Retry the same procedure after waiting for a period.
(xxx-yyy)
A fault has O O O O O [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the
occurred. The machine restarted automatically.
machine has [Remedy] Select the [Close] button. The machine is operating
rebooted. normally now. If the error persists, call our Call Center.
Select [Close].
If the problem 13
persists, call
for service.
(xxx-yyy)
343
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams
When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A
message is also displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed and
remove the jammed paper.
Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn while it is being
removed from the machine, remove all torn pieces making sure that none remain inside
the machine.
If a paper jam message is displayed again after you have cleared the paper jam, paper
is probably jammed at another location. Clear this by following the message.
When you have finished clearing a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from
the state before the paper jam occurred.
If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the <Start> button. Copying is resumed
Problem Solving
from the state before the paper jam occurred.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a
paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or
burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox
13 representative.
This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:
The references are described below.
Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ..................................................................................................345
Paper Jams in the Tray 3 ...........................................................................................................345
Paper Jams in the Tray 4 ...........................................................................................................346
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)............................................................................................346
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) ................................................................................348
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................................................350
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module...........................................................................................353
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover .......................................................................................354
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover.....................................................................................355
Paper Jams in the Output Tray..................................................................................................357
Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.......................................357
Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker .................................................................370
Important • When a paper jam occurs, paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you
pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine
malfunctions. Check where the paper jam occurred first.
• If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not
disappear from the touch screen.
• Clear the paper jams while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information
stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
• Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.
344
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Trays 1 to 2.
1 Pull out the tray where the paper

jam occurred.
Important • Paper is sometimes torn and
remains inside the machine if
you pull out a tray without
checking the paper jam
position. This may cause
machine malfunction. Check
where the paper jam occurred
first.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Problem Solving
Note • If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
13
Paper Jams in the Tray 3

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 3.

jam occurred.
first.

machine.
345
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Tray 4

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 4.

jam occurred.
first.

Problem Solving

machine.
13
3 If paper is jammed in the paper
feed section, open the inner cover
and remove the paper.
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 5 (bypass).
1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) top cover

to remove the jammed paper.
machine.
346
Paper Jams
2 Remove all paper loaded in the

Tray 5 (bypass).
Important • When two or more sheets of
paper are loaded, remove all
of the sheets from the tray.
machine.
3 Close the top cover.

4 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.
5 Insert the paper into the tray with
Problem Solving
the printing side facing up until its
leading edge lightly comes up
against the paper feed entrance.
13
malfunctions.
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass) when A3+ High Capacity Tray is
installed
The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 5 (bypass) when the A3+
High Capacity Tray is installed.
1 Remove the jammed paper and all

paper loaded in the Tray 5
(bypass).
machine.
2 If you cannot remove the paper in

Step 1, open the front cover of the
High Capacity Tray Unit.
For information on how to clear paper
jams inside the High Capacity Tray
Unit, refer to "Paper Jams in the Tray 6
(A3+ High Capacity)" (P.350).
347
13 Problem Solving

Steps 1 and 2, open the Tray 5
(bypass) top cover to remove all
paper loaded in the Tray 5
(bypass).
machine.
4 Close the top cover.

5 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.
6 Insert the paper into the tray with
Problem Solving
the printing side facing up until its

leading edge lightly comes up
against the paper feed entrance.
13
malfunctions.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity).
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Exit ........................................................................348
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Top Cover..............................................................349
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) ................................................................................349
Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed
and remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Exit
1 Gently move the Tray 6 (High

Capacity) to the left until it stops by
gripping the handle on the top left
side of the Tray 6 (High Capacity).

machine.
348
Paper Jams
3 Gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Top Cover
1 Gently move the Tray 6 (High

Capacity) to the left until it stops by
gripping the handle on the top left
side of the Tray 6 (High Capacity).
Problem Solving
2 Open the Tray 6 (High Capacity)
top cover.
1
2
13
machine.
4 Close the top cover and gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.
5 Gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)

stops.
349
13 Problem Solving

machine.
3 Push the tray in gently until it

comes to a stop.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

Problem Solving
The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).
The references are as follows:
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................................................350
Paper jams at lever 1a or knob 1c .............................................................................................351
13 Paper jams at lever 1b or knob 1c .............................................................................................351

Paper jams at lever 1d or knob 1c .............................................................................................352
Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed
and remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

stops.

torn pieces of paper in the
tray.
350
Paper Jams
Paper jams at lever 1a or knob 1c
1 Open the front cover of the High

Capacity Tray Unit.
2 Move the lever 1a to the right, and

then turn the knob 1c clockwise.
Problem Solving
Remove the jammed paper.
unit.
3 Return the lever 1a to the original

position. 13
4 Close the front cover of the A3+ High Capacity Tray Unit.
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High
Capacity Tray Unit is even slightly open.
Paper jams at lever 1b or knob 1c

Capacity Tray Unit.
351
13 Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 1b to the right, and

then turn the knob 1c clockwise.
unit.
3 Return the lever 1b to the original

position.
Problem Solving
4 Close the front cover of the High

Capacity Tray Unit.
13 Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High
Paper jams at lever 1d or knob 1c

Capacity Tray Unit.
2 Move the lever 1d upward and

remove the jammed paper
unit.
3 If the paper cannot be removed in

Step 2, turn the knob 1c clockwise,
and then remove the jammed
paper.
unit.
352
Paper Jams
4 Return the lever 1d to the original

position.
5 Close the front cover of the High Capacity Tray Unit.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the transfer module.

stopped before opening the front 13
cover.
2 Turn the green lever 2 at the center

of the transfer module to the right
until it is in the horizontal position
and then pull the transfer module
out to the end.
3 Remove the visible jammed paper.

machine.
353
13 Problem Solving
4 Remove the jammed paper while

opening the lever 2a to the
rightward.
5 Pull down the lever 2b and remove

the jammed paper.
Problem Solving
6 Return the levers 2a and 2b to the original position.

13 7 Insert the transfer module
completely and turn the green lever
2 to the left.
Note • If you cannot turn the lever,
pull the transfer module to the
middle and insert it again.

slightly open.
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom left cover.
1 If the Tray 6 (High Capacity) is

installed, gently move the Tray 6
(High Capacity) to the left until it
stops by gripping the handle on the
top left side of the Tray 6 (High
Capacity).
354
Paper Jams
2 Open the bottom left cover while

gripping the release lever.
3 Remove the upper jammed paper.

machine.
Problem Solving
4 Remove the lower jammed paper.
torn pieces of paper inside the 13
machine.
5 Close the bottom left cover.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom left cover is even
slightly open.
6 If the Tray 6 (High Capacity) is installed in the machine, gently put the Tray 6 (High
Capacity) back into position.
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom right cover.
1 If the finisher is installed, follow the

steps below. If no finisher is
installed, go to Step 2.
1) Make sure that the machine is
turn off, and then open the
front cover of the finisher.
355
13 Problem Solving
2) Pull the lever 1a rightward.
2 Open the bottom right cover while

pressing the downward arrow
button.
Problem Solving
3 Remove the upper jammed paper.
13 Note • If paper is torn, check for any

machine.
4 Remove the lower jammed paper.

machine.
5 Check whether paper is jammed at the lower part of the machine. If there is jammed
paper, remove it.
Note • If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.
6 Close the bottom right cover.
Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom right cover is
even slightly open.
7 If the finisher is installed, return the lever 1a to the original position and then close the
356
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in the Output Tray

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the output tray.
1 Remove jammed paper from the

output tray.
machine.
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker
The following describes how to clear paper jams in the finisher when the C-Finisher or
the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
Paper Jams at the Lever 1a ....................................................................................................... 357
Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c.......................................................................... 358
13
Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b.......................................................................................... 359
Paper Jams at the Lever 2a ....................................................................................................... 361
Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c).................................................................... 362
Paper Jams at the Lever 2b....................................................................................................... 363
Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c) ................................................................... 363
Paper Jams at the Lever 3......................................................................................................... 365
Paper Jams at the Lever 5......................................................................................................... 366
Paper Jams at the 4a (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)................................................ 366
Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker) ..................................... 367
Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker) .............................. 369
Paper Jams at the Lever 1a

357
13 Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 1a to the right.

Problem Solving

machine.

position.
Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c

358
Paper Jams
2) Pull the lever 1a rightward..
2 Move the lever 1d to the left and

then move the lever 6 upward.
Problem Solving
3 Turn the wheel 1c to the direction
indicated by the arrow, and then
remove the jammed paper. 13
machine.
4 Return the levers 1d and 6 to the original position.

Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b

359
13 Problem Solving

Problem Solving

machine.
4 If the paper cannot be removed,

return the lever 1a and then move
the lever 1b to the right.
5 Gently pull out the paper to

remove.
machine.
6 Return the levers 1b to the original position.

360
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Lever 2a
1 If the edge of the jammed paper

comes out from the exit of the
output tray, gently pull out the
paper to remove.
Problem Solving
2 Open the front cover of the finisher.
13

machine.
5 Return the lever 2a to the original position.

361
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c)
1 If the edge of the jammed paper

comes out from the exit of the
output tray, gently pull out the
paper to remove.
2 Open the front cover of the finisher.

Problem Solving
13 3 Move the lever 2a to the right.

indicated by the arrow, and then

remove.
machine.
6 Return the lever 2a to the original position.

362
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Lever 2b

Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 2b to the right and
13
torn pieces of paper inside the 2b
machine.
3 Return the lever 2b to the original position.

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c)

363
13 Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 2b to the right, and

then remove the jammed paper.
torn pieces of paper inside the 2b
Problem Solving
machin
13 indicated by the arrow, and then


remove.
machin

364
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Lever 3

Problem Solving
2 Pull down the lever 3. 13

machin.
4 Return the lever 3 to the original position.

365
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Lever 5
1 Open the exit cover 5 of the finisher

upward.
2 Gently pull out the paper towards

you to remove.
Problem Solving

machin.
13
3 Return the exit cover 5 to the original position.
Paper Jams at the 4a (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)

366
Paper Jams
2 Pull out the unit 4.
3 Turn the wheel 4a to the left and

Problem Solving
4 Return the unit 4 to the original position.
13
Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)

367
13 Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 4b to the left.
3 Remove the jammed paper if there

is.
Problem Solving
13
5 Remove all jammed paper that

comes out from the left upper side
and inside the unit.
machin.

368
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)

Problem Solving
2 Turn the wheel 4a to the right to
eject the jammed paper onto the
13
booklet tray.

machin.

369
13 Problem Solving
Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the finisher when the D2-Finisher
with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
Paper Jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer) .......................................................................................370
Paper Jams at the Lever 1a and the Knob 1c ............................................................................371
Paper Jams at the Lever 1d .......................................................................................................371
Paper Jams at the Lever 1b .......................................................................................................372
Paper Jams at the Lever 3b and 3d............................................................................................373
Paper Jams at the Lever 3e and the Knob 3c ............................................................................373
Paper Jams at the Lever 3g and the Knob 3f.............................................................................374
Paper Jams at the Lever 4b and the Knob 3a ............................................................................375
Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Lever 2a and the Knob 3a when Z Folding Unit is Installed .......................375
Paper Jams at the Lever 2b and the Knob 2c when Z Folding Unit is Installed .......................376
Paper Jams at the Knob 2c, the Levers 2e/2f and the Tri-fold Output Tray 2d when Z Folding Unit is
Installed.....................................................................................................................................377
Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Tray 2d and the Lever 2g when Z Folding Unit is Installed ..........378
Paper Jams at the Unit 4 and Knob 4a for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker .....................378
13 Paper Jams at the Output Tray ..................................................................................................379

Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray ................................................................................................379
Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ...................380
The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet
Maker.
Paper Jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer)

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer)
1 Press <Cover> button.
2 Open the cover [1e], and then

remove the jammed paper and all
paper loaded in the Interposer.
machine.
3 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and
then load them again.
370
Paper Jams
4 Push the cover [1e] until you hear it

click into place and the close it.
Note • A message will be displayed
and the machine will not
operate if the cover is even
slightly open.
Paper Jams at the Lever 1a and the Knob 1c

stopped before opening the left
Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 1a downwards and

turn the knob 1c anti-clockwise.
13
machine.

position.
4 Close the finisher left cover.

Paper Jams at the Lever 1d

371
13 Problem Solving
2 Move the lever 1d upwards and

machine.
3 Return the lever 1d to the original

position.
Problem Solving

13 is even slightly open.
Paper Jams at the Lever 1b

2 Move the lever 1b rightwards and

machine.

position.

372
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Lever 3b and 3d

stopped before opening the right
2 Move the levers 3b and 3d, and

Problem Solving
machine.
3 Return the lever 3b and 3d to the

original position.
13
4 Close the finisher right cover.

Paper Jams at the Lever 3e and the Knob 3c

2 Move the levers 3e and turn the

knob 3c to the right. Remove the
jammed paper.
machine.
373
13 Problem Solving
3 Return the lever 3e to the original

position.

Paper Jams at the Lever 3g and the Knob 3f

Problem Solving

13
2 Move the levers 3g and turn the
knob 3f to the left. Remove the
jammed paper.
machine.
3 Return the lever 3g to the original

position.

374
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Lever 4b and the Knob 3a

2 Move the levers 4b and turn the

knob 3a to the right. Remove the
Problem Solving
jammed paper.
machine.

position.
13

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a and the Knob 3a when Z Folding Unit is Installed

2 Move the lever 2a and turn the

knob 3a to the left. Remove the
jammed paper.
machine.
375
13 Problem Solving

position.

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b and the Knob 2c when Z Folding Unit is Installed
Problem Solving

13
2 Move the levers 2b and turn the
knob 3a to the right. Remove the
jammed paper.
machine.

position.

376
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Knob 2c, the Levers 2e/2f and the Tri-fold Output Tray 2d
when Z Folding Unit is Installed

2 Pull out the tri-fold output tray 2d,
Problem Solving
swing the lever 2e, and remove the
jammed paper.
machine.

13
Step 2, return the lever 2e to the
original position. Swing the lever
2e, turn the knob 2c to the right,
then remove the jammed paper.
machine.
4 Swing back the opened lever (2f or

2e), and push back the tri-fold
output tray 2d.

377
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Tray 2d and the Lever 2g when Z Folding Unit is Installed

2 Pull out the tri-fold output tray 2d,

swing the lever 2g, and remove the
Problem Solving
jammed paper.
machine.
13 3 Return the lever 2g to the original

position and push back the tri-fold
output tray 2d.

Paper Jams at the Unit 4 and Knob 4a for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

378
Paper Jams
3 Turn the knob 4a to the left to

remove all the jammed paper from
the left side of the unit 4.
machine.

Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Output Tray

output tray.
13
machine.
2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher.

Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray

finisher tray.
machine.
2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher.

379
13 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

2 Turn the knob 4a to the right to

remove the jammed paper at the
Problem Solving
booklet output tray.

machine.
3
13
Close the finisher right cover.
• A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher
380
Document Jams
Document Jams
If a document jams in the document feeder, the machine stops, and an error message
is displayed on the screen. Clear the document jam according to the instructions
displayed, and then load the document again on the document feeder.
This section describes how to clear document jams at the following locations:
Document Jams at the covers ................................................................................................... 381
Document Jams at the Document Cover .................................................................................. 383
Note • Remedy differs depending on where the document jam occurs. Follow the instructions
displayed and remove the jammed paper.
Document Jams at the covers
Problem Solving
1 Grip the handle of the top cover of
the document feeder, and open the
top cover until it comes to a stop.
Note • When you fully open the
cover, it enters a fixed
position. Open the cover
gently.
13
2 Open the left cover until it comes to
a stop.
3 If the document is not caught in the

entry of the document feeder, pull
out the document.
4 If there are instructions to open the

inner cover in the message, lift up
the lever with the green label on it,
and open the inner cover (1).
Remove the jammed document (2).
Important • If the document is stuck, do
not pull on it directly. The
document could be damaged.
381
13 Problem Solving
5 If the message indicates paper jam

inside of the left cover, open the
cover and remove the jammed
document.
6 Close the top cover of the inner cover until you hear it click into place.
7
Problem Solving
Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.
8 If the document cannot be found, pick up the document feeder slowly, and remove the
document if it is there, then close the document feeder.
9 If the document is not found in Step
8, then pick up the document
feeder tray and remove the
13 document.
10 Gently return the document feeder tray.

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the document
again following the instructions displayed on the screen.
Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again, including the purged
document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and
scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.
• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
382
Document Jams
Document Jams at the Document Cover
2 Open the belt of the document

cover while gripping the lever, and
Problem Solving
remove the jammed document.
3 Gently return the belt to the original

position.
13
4 Return the document cover to the original position.

5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the document
again following the instructions displayed on the screen.
Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again, including the purged
document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and
scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.
• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
383
13 Problem Solving
Stapler Faults
The following describes stapler troubles when the finisher (optional) is installed.
Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples
are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have
tried the following solutions.
Unstapled Bent staple

Problem Solving
If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below, contact
13 One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction
Flattened staple Entire staple rising up
Staple rising up with

center pressed in
Important • If paper that has a weight of 90 g/m2 or more is to be stapled using the D2-Finisher with
Booklet Maker, a staple may be bent for even a stack of 100 sheets or less, or a staple may
be bent and jam inside the machine, causing paper jams.
• Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove the
bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when
removing the bent staple.
384
Stapler Faults
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with

Booklet Maker
The following describes how to clear staple jams in the staple cartridge when the C-
Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.

Problem Solving
2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple
cartridge holder, and pull out the
holder to the right towards you.
13
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder

by gripping the orange lever.
Note • The staple cartridge is firmly
held. When remove the staple
cartridge, strongly pull the
cartridge.
4 After removing the staple cartridge,

check the inside of the finisher for
any remaining staples.
385
13 Problem Solving
5 Pull up the metal part of the staple

cartridge shown in the figure.
6 Remove the jammed staples (1),

and return the metal part pulled up
in Step 5 to the original position (2).
Problem Solving
CAUTION
Be careful in removing jammed
staples.
7 Insert the staple cartridge while
13 gripping the orange lever until you

hear it click into place.

If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our
Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet
Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
The following describes how to clear staple jams in the booklet staple cartridge when
the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is
installed.
The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the C-Finisher with Booklet
Maker. The procedure is the same as for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.
CAUTION
386
Stapler Faults

2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the

right (1), and pull out the unit (2).
R3
R2
Problem Solving
3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple
cartridge, and then lift to remove it.
13
4 Remove the jammed staples as

shown in the figure.
CAUTION
Be careful in removing jammed
staples.
5 Holding the tabs of the removed

booklet staple cartridge, return the
cartridge to the original position
and gently push it until you hear it
click into place.
387
13 Problem Solving
6 Return the unit to its original

position.

Problem Solving
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
13 The following describes how to clear staple jams in the staple cartridge when the D2-
Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet
Maker.
CAUTION

2 Hold the R1 at the position shown

in the diagram.
388
Stapler Faults
3 Pull out the unit.

Note • After removing the unit, check
the inside of the finisher for
any remaining staples.
4 Open the unit as shown in the

diagram and remove the jammed
staple.
Problem Solving
5 Push the removed unit back to the
original position.
13

389
13 Problem Solving
Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with

Booklet Maker
The following describes how to set the staple cartridge to its unit when it has been
attached incorrectly or taken off from its unit accidentally.
CAUTION
1 Open the staple cartridge cover as

shown in the diagram, and remove
the jammed staple.
Problem Solving
13 2 See a lever on the rear side of the

unit.
3 Move the lever in the direction of

the arrow shown in the diagram.
Important • Be careful when removing
jammed staples to avoid
hurting your fingers and nails.
4 Turn the unit upside holding the

lever, and then take off the staple
cartridge from its unit.
390
Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker
5 Tear the outside staples along the

line as shown in the diagram.
Important • Be careful when removing
jammed staples to avoid
hurting your fingers.
6 Push the staple cartridge in the

unit.
Problem Solving
7 Return the unit to the original
position.
13

391
13 Problem Solving
Solving Curled Output
You can correct the curling of the output by pressing the De-curl button.
The De-curl button functions both in suspension and in operation if the power of the
machine is on.
Note • To change the curling correction mode while the machine is in operation, press the De-curl
button and then the change will be applied immediately.
• Pressing the Reset button on the control panel cannot change the curling correction mode.
1 Check how the output copy is

curled.
Problem Solving
2 Check that De-curl lights up.

13 Note • When turning on the power of
this machine, the de-curl
mode is set to Auto.
• When you cancel the Power
Saver Mode, the de-curl mode
will be set to Auto.
3 Press De-curl.
Note • Pressing the De-curl button toggles the mode between Auto, ON, and OFF.
For more information, refer to "De-curl button" (P.38).
392
14 Appendix
This chapter describes the specifications, printable area, optional accessories

list, and cautions/restrictions.
z Specifications............................................................................................394
z Printable Area ...........................................................................................402
z List of Options...........................................................................................403
z Notes and Restrictions..............................................................................404
14 Appendix
Specifications
This section lists the specifications of the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. In the interests of
product development, product specifications and external appearance are subject to
change without prior notice.
Main Unit and Copier Specifications
Type Console Type

Color support Full color
Scan resolution 600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)
Output resolution 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)
Color graduation 256 color graduation for each color (16,700,000 colors).
Warm-up time 150 seconds or less (when the room temperature at 20 oC, input
voltage 220 V)
Important • It may take longer due to the network condition, or the
image quality adjustment according to the machine
condition.
Appendix
Copy document The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets
and books.
Copy (sheet) size Maximum: A3, 330 x 488 mm (13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”).
14 Minimum: A5 (Postcards for the Tray 5 (bypass))

Image loss width: First 4mm or less, last 4 mm or less, and top/
front 3mm or less.
[Tray 1 - 2]
A5, A4, A4 , A3
B5, B5 , B4
8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11” , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 16K
Non-standard size: X (horizontal) 140 to 297mm
Y (vertical) 182 to 432 mm
[[Tray 3 - 4]
A4 , 8.5 x 11” , B5
[Tray 5 (Bypass)]
A6, A5, A4, A4 , A3, SRA3
B6, B5, B5 , B4
8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 12 x 18”, 13
x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”
Postcards, return postcards, tab paper (A4 ), tab paper (8.5 x
11” )
non-standard size: X from 100 to 330 mm, Y from 148 to 488
mm
Copy paper Paper Tray 1 - 4: 64 - 220 g/m2
Paper Tray 5 (Bypass): 64 - 300 g/m2
Important • It is recommend using Xerox recommended papers.
Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the
deployment conditions.
394
Specifications
Fast copy time <DocuColor 6075II>

Document glass:
z
For A4 /monochrome priority mode
(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])
Monochrome: 4.1 seconds
Color: 12.0 seconds
z
For A4 /color priority mode
(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [Dual
Colors], or [Single Color])
Color: 10.3 seconds
Duplex automatic document feeder:

z For A4 /monochrome priority mode
Color: 12.9 seconds
z
For A4 /color priority mode
Appendix
Color: 11.3 seconds
Same magnification, from the Tray 1, single sided, and output to

the output tray.
<DocuColor 5065II>
Document glass:
z For A4
14
/monochrome priority mode
Color: 9.1 seconds
z For A4 /color priority mode
Color: 7.8 seconds
Duplex automatic document feeder:

z For A4 /monochrome priority mode
Color: 11.4 seconds
z For A4 /color priority mode
Color: 10.1 seconds
Same magnification, from the Tray 1, single sided, and output to

the output tray.
Copy reduction/ Same magnification
enlargement ratio 1:1± 0.7%
Fixed reduction/enlargement ratios
1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225,
and 1:1.414
Custom reduction/enlargement ratios
1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% increments)
395
14 Appendix
Continuous copy speed <DocuColor 6075II>

z
Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
Important [Monochrome] [Color]
z The speed may be
B5 , A4 : 75 pages/min. 60 pages/min.
reduced in order to adjust B5, A4 : 54 pages/min. 44 pages/min.
the image quality.
z The performance may be
B4 : 44 pages/min. 36 pages/min.
A3 : 37 pages/min. 30 pages/min.
reduced depending on
the paper type.
z
Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
z
After delivering the first [Monochrome] [Color]
page, the copy speed for B5 , A4 : 75 pages/min. 54 pages/min.
remaining pages B5, A4 : 50 pages/min. 43 pages/min.
becomes the same speed B4 : 44 pages/min. 36 pages/min.
as 1 sided copying. A3 : 37 pages/min. 30 pages/min.
z Paper Tray 5*: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5, A4 : 41 pages/min. 37 pages/min.
Appendix
14 <DocuColor 5065II>
z Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
z Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass tray) and the paper size is
set to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page will be
slower.
396
Specifications
Feeding method/Paper Standard : 560 sheets x 2 trays + 980 sheets

capacity + 1,280 sheets + 250 sheets (bypass tray)
Optional : 2,300 sheets (Tray 6 (high capacity))
2,300 sheets (Tray 6 (A3+ high capacity))
Maximum paper capacity: 5,930 sheets
(standard + Tray 6 (high capacity))
Important • When using Xerox P paper
Continuous copy pages 9999 sheets
Important • The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image
stabilization process.
Output tray capacity Output tray: approximately 500 sheets (A4)
Finisher tray (optional): approximately 500 sheets (A4)
Power source <DocuColor 6075II>
220 - 240V, 15A
<DocuColor 5065II>
220 - 240V, 10A
Maximum power <DocuColor 6075II>
consumption Maximum Power 3.3 KW or less
Appendix
TEC (Typical Energy Consumption) 18.52kWh/week
<DocuColor 5065II>
Maximum Power 2.2 KW or less
TEC (Typical Energy Consumption) 17.23kWh/week
Dimensions
Weight
Width 1011.0 x Depth 915.0 x Height 1,370.0 mm
259 kg
14
(excluding papers and Important • The weight is with a new toner cartridge without any
options) papers.
Minimum Space Width 1,574.0 x Depth 915.0 mm (when the bypass tray is
Requirements extended to the maximum).
Print Feature Specifications
Type Bustle type

Continuous printing The same as the main body.
speed Important • The speed is reduced due to the image quality adjustment
when High Image Quality is specified in a PostScript driver
or PCL driver.
• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper
type.
Resolution Output resolution:
2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)
Data processing resolution:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (47.2 x 47.2 dots/mm: monochrome)
600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)
Page description z PCL
language z PostScript3
Supported protocols Ethernet :TCP/IP(SMB, LPD, Port9100, IPP),
IPX/SPX (NetWare), Ether Talk*
Important • For Ether Talk, MacOS 9.1 - Mac OS 9.2.2, and Mac OS X
10.2.4 - 10.3.3 are supported.
397
14 Appendix
Supported operating PCL : Windows 2000/XP English versions

systems Windows Server 2003 English versions
PostScript : Windows 2000/XP English versions
Windows Server 2003 English versions
Mac OS 9.1 - Mac OS 9.2.2 English version
Mac OS X 10.2.4 - 10.3.4 English versions
Built-in fonts PCL : European 81 type faces, symbol 35 sets
PostScript : European 136 type faces
Emulation PCL6c
Memory capacity 1 GB (512 MB x 2)
Interface Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T(Auto))
Scan Feature Specifications
Type Color scanner

Scan Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets
and books.
Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 200 x 200dpi
Appendix
(23.6 x 23.6, 15.7 x 15.7, 11.8 x 11.8, 7.9 x 7.9 dots/mm)

Scan graduation 10 bits input for each RGB colors, 8 bits output
Document scanning Monochrome, 1 sided: 100 pages/min.
speed Color, 1 sided : 50 pages/min.
14 Monochrome, 2 sided: 57 pages/min.

Note • The scanning speed varies by documents and resolutions. Scan
to Mailbox for A4 (Xerox standard document) documents with
200 dpi.
Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T(Auto)
Document Feeder Specifications
Original size/type Maximum: A3, 11 x 17” (297 x 432 mm)

Minimum: A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5”, 5.5 x 8.5” (139.7 x 210 mm)
38 - 200 g/m2 (2-sided Simultaneous Scan: 50 - 128 g/m2)
Number of originals held 250
Original changing speed <DocuColor 6075II>
Monochrome : 75 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)
Color : 50 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)
<DocuColor 5065II>
Monochrome : 65 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)
Color : 50 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)
High Capacity Paper Tray Specifications
Copy (sheet) size/type A4, 8.5 x 11” , B5

64 - 176 g/m2
Feeding stage number/ 2,300 sheets x 1 stage
paper capacity Important • When using Xerox P paper
Dimensions/weight Width 389.0 x Depth 610 .0 x Height 377.0 mm, 29 kg
Important • The weight does not include any papers.
398
Specifications
Floor space when Width 1574.0 x Depth 915.0 mm

connected to the main (for the main body with the high capacity paper tray, the output
body tray, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)
A3+ High Capacity Paper Tray Specifications
Copy (sheet) size/type Maximum:13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2” , Minimum:B5

64 - 300 g/m2
Feeding stage number/ 2,300 sheets x 1 stage
paper capacity Important • When using Xerox P paper
Dimensions/weight Width 988.0 x Depth 785 .0* x Height 930.0 mm, 120 kg
Important • The weight does not include any paper.
* When loading paper of 13 x 18" or 13 x 19", the depth will be 801
mm.
Floor space when Width 2045.0 x Depth 915.0 mm
C-Finisher Specifications
Appendix
Tray type Output tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)
Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)
Paper size/supported Output tray Max.: 13 x 19, Min.: Postcards, 64 - 280 g/m2
papers
Tray capacity
Finisher tray Max.: 12 x 18,
Output tray : 500 sheets
Min.: B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2
14
Finisher tray : paper (width < 216 mm): 3,000 sheets
paper (width > 216 mm): 1,500 sheets
mixed size*: 300 sheets
* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.
Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets
(not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in
thickness)
Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5
Staple position: 1 place (front: angled, back: parallel,
angled),
2 places (parallel)
Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5
Number of punching holes:2 or 4, 3 (optional)
Dimensions/weight Width 772 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm, 55 kg
(863 mm width and 1065 height when the extension flap is
extended)
Floor space when Width 2,038 x Depth 915 mm
connected to the main (for the main body with the C-Finisher, the extension flap
body extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)
C-Finisher with Booklet Maker Specifications
Tray type Output tray x 1 : Collated/Uncollated (offset available)

Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)
Booklet tray x 1
399
14 Appendix
Paper size/supported Output tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”

papers Minimum: Postcards, 64 - 300 g/m2
Finisher tray Maximum: 3 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”
Minimum: B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2
Booklet tray Maximum: 13 x 18”
Minimum: 8.5 x 11”, 64 - 90 g/m2
Tray capacity Output tray : 500 pages
Finisher tray : 1,500 sheets, Mixed size*: 300 sheets
Booklet tray : 20 sets
* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.
Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets
(not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in
thickness)
Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5
Staple position: 1 place (front: angled, back: parallel,
angled),
2 places (parallel)
Staple for booklet : 15 sheets
Appendix

Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5
Number of punching holes:2 or 4, 3 (optional)
Paper type : 64 - 176 g/m2
14 Power source/Maximum
Power consumption
110 - 120V AC & 220 - 240V AC / 203 W
Dimensions/weight Width 921 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm, 86 kg

(1,065 mm height when the extension flap is extended)
Floor space when Width 2,096 x Depth 915 mm
connected to the main (for the main body with the C-Finisher, the extension flap
body extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)
D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker Specifications
Tray type Top tray × 1 : Collate / Stack

Finisher tray × 1: Collate (offset stacking available)/
Stack (offset stacking available)
Booklet tray × 1
Paper size/Supported Top tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”
paper Minimum: A6 (postcards), 64 - 300 g/m2
Finisher tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”
Minimum: B5 , 64 - 300 g/m2
Booklet tray Maximum: 13 x 18”
Minimum: A4, 8.5 x 11”, 64 - 90 g/m2
Important • A paper for cover is available 220 g/m2 or less.
• Paper for contents is available 60 -80 g/m2, when a paper
91 - 200 g/m2 is used for a cover attached.
Tray capacity Top tray : 500 sheets
Finisher tray : 2,000 sheets, 200 sets*
* When using A4 , B5 , 8.5 × 11" only. When using other size,
tray capacity is 1,500 sheets, 100 sets.
Booklet tray :20 sets*
Important • Some papers may not be placed into tray depending on the
paper type.
400
Specifications
Staple Maximum stapled sheets: 100 sheets (when using 64 - 90 g/m2

paper)
Important • When using paper over A4, or 8.5 × 11", maximum stapled
sheets is 65 sheets.
• Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the
stapled nails may be bent.
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 × 17",
Minimum: B5
Stapling position : 1 place (front : angled stapling, center :
parallel stapling, back : parallel stapling,
angled stapling*)
: 2 places (parallel stapling)
* angled stapling for A3 and A4
Punching Size suitable for punching : Maximum: A3, 11×17"
: Minimum: B5 (2 holes), A4 (4 holes)
Number of punching holes : 2 or 4, 3 (optional)
Center binding/folding Maximum number of sheets:
center binding: 15 sheets
center folding : 5 sheets
Appendix
• When a cover is attached, maximum number of sheets is 14
sheets.
• Maximum staple-enabled number of paper can be changed
because of customer engineer setting.
Paper size:Maximum: 13 x 18", Minimum: A4, 8.5 × 11" 14
Paper type: center binding: 64 - 90 g /m2
center folding : 64 - 90 g /m2
Important • A paper for cover is available 220 g/m2 or less.
• Paper for contents is available 64 -80 g/m2 , when a paper
91 - 220 g/m2 is used for a cover attached.
• Uneven page alignment may occur depending on some
condition such as paper type being used.
Holding <Z-Fold>
(when folding unit D2 is Paper size : A3, B4, 11 × 17"
installed) Paper type : 64 - 90 g/m2
<Tri-Fold>
Paper size : A4, 8.5 × 11"
Interposer Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 × 17",
Minimum: B5
Important • You cannot copy on the paper loaded in interposer.
Capacity : 200 sheets
Power source/Maximum 110 - 120V AC & 220 - 240V AC / 203 W
Power consumption
Dimensions/Weight Width 1,050 × Depth 725 × Height 1,165 mm, 130 kg
When folding unit D2 is installed :
Width 1,250 × Depth 725 × Height 1,165 mm, 170 kg
Note • This weight includes staple cartridge.
Floor space when Width 2225.0 x depth 915.0 mm
401
14 Appendix
Printable Area
The standard area that can be printed leaves a margin of 4.0mm on all four edges of
the paper (for 13 x 18”(330 mm width), a margin of 3.5mm left and right). Note that the
actual printing area may vary depending on the printer (plotter) control language.
For printing,the maximum printable area is 323 x 480 mm (print assured area becomes
317 x 480 mm). For copying, the maximum printable are is 297 x 432 mm (print assured
area: 297 x 432 mm).
Depending on the paper size, however, the unprintable area is different.
.
When the paper width is 12.6 inches When the paper width is 330mm
(320 mm width) (320 mm width)
4mm 4mm
Printing
Appendix
6.5mm 6.5mm
3mm 3mm 3.5mm 3.5mm
14
4mm 4mm
4mm 4mm
Copying
3mm 3mm 16.5mm 16.5mm
4mm 52mm
402
List of Options
List of Options
The following are the principal options available. To purchase these, contact our
Product name Description

Offset stacking module This unit allows to eject paper with an offset.
C-Finisher This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or
copies.
C-Finisher with Booklet This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or
Maker copies. Features for folding documents in half, and stapling the
folded documents are also available.
D2-Finisher with Booklet Staples or hole-punches output. It also folds output in half or
Maker staples folded output.
Interposer is installed for loading paper to be used as
separators and covers.
High capacity paper tray This tray allows to load 2,300 sheets of paper (When using
Appendix
Xerox P paper).
A3+ High capacity paper This tray allows to load 2,300 sheets of paper (When using
tray Xerox P paper).
Note • The products are liable to change.

• For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center. 14
403
14 Appendix
Notes and Restrictions
This section describes notes and restrictions on the use of the machine.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine
Installing and Moving the Machine

z
When moving the machine from its rack, contact our Customer Support Center.
z When moving the machine, do not subject the unit to shocks.
z When closing the document cover, be careful not to trap your fingers.
z
Do not place things close to the ventilation opening of the extractor fan of the
machine.
Meter Counts for 2-sided Printing

z
For 2-sided printing, depending on the application being used and the way in which
Appendix
the number of copies is specified, blank pages may be inserted automatically. In this
case, the blank page inserted by the application is counted for metering purposes.
Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job

14 When interrupting, some jobs such as print jobs set by a client cannot be executed.
The following are the jobs that can/cannot be executed while interrupting.
Control
Job Execution
Panel*1
Copy Yes O
Print Print jobs set by a client. No X
Scan Network scanning Yes O
Report Auto print of job reports No O
Manual print of job reports Yes O
O Can be executed while interrupting

X Cannot be executed while interrupting
U Receives a job from a client or other machine, however cannot be executed while interrupting
*1 Operation on the control panel is necessary to execute a job
404
Index
Index
Symbols attaching a cover to copies .......................................97

Audio Tones (System Settings)..............................198
<All Services> button ................................................. 45 Auditron Mode (System Settings) ..........................259
<C> (Clear) button...................................................... 46 authenticated users ..................................................282
<Clear All> ................................................................... 46 authentication and auditron administration...281, 284
<Confirmation> indicator ........................................... 35 Auto Clear (System Settings) .................................196
<Custom> button ........................................................ 45 Auto Clear Alert Tone (System Settings)..............199
<Dial Pause> button................................................... 46 Auto Display of Login Screen (System Settings).201
<Interrupt> button/indicator....................................... 46 Auto Job Promotion (System Settings) .................217
<Job in Memory> indicator................................46, 315 Auto Job Release (System Settings).....................196
<Job Status> button ................................................... 46 Auto Paper Off (System Settings)..........................232
<Log In/Out> button ................................................... 46 Auto Paper Select (System Settings) ....................205
<Machine Status> button .......................................... 46 Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver
<Online> indicator ...................................................... 46 (System Settings) .....................................................197
<Power saver> button................................................ 46 Auto Size Detect .......................................................143
<Review> button......................................................... 46 Auto Tray Switching (System Settings).................209
<Speed Dial> button .................................................. 46
<Start> button ............................................................. 46 B
<Stop> button.............................................................. 46
Background Pattern (System Settings).................217
Numerics Background Suppression (System Settings)
.............................................................................212, 227
2 Sided Book Copy..................................................... 82 Background Suppression Level
2 Sided Copying ......................................................... 91 (System Settings) .....................................................245
2 Sided Copying (System Settings)....................... 228 Background Suppression Level (Text)
2 Sided Originals ..............................................136, 141 (System Settings) .....................................................233
2 Sided Report (System Settings) ......................... 214 Background Suppress Level (Photo & Text)
(System Settings) .....................................................232
A Base Tone (System Settings) .................................198
Basic Scanning .........................................................135
A3+ High Capacity Tray (Tray 6) ............................. 36
Bates Stamping (System Settings) ........................236
Account Limit (System Settings) ............................ 254
Index
Bates Stamping - Number of Digits

adding stamp/date/page number to copies .......... 103
(System Settings) .....................................................230
Adjust Image Position (System Settings) ............. 216
adjusting color balance.............................................. 78
(System Settings) .....................................................230
adjusting color tone .................................................... 78
adjusting the copy density......................................... 73
(System Settings) .....................................................230
adjusting the scan density and contrast................ 138
Bates Stamping - Size (System Settings).............230
Alert Tone (System Settings).................................. 199
Billing Meter ...............................................................272
All Services (System Settings) ............................... 201
Billing Meter/Print Report.........................................272
All Services - Additional Features
Book Copying ..............................................................80
(System Settings) ..................................................... 202
Booklet Creation .........................................................94
Annotation.................................................................. 103
Booklet Creation - Covers Tray (System Settings)
Annotation - Create Stamps (System Settings)... 239
405
..................................................................................... 231 Contrast (System Settings) ..................................... 227
booklet output tray...................................................... 38 control panel................................................................ 33
booklet output tray button ......................................... 38 Control Panel Alert Tone (System Settings) ........ 198
booklet staple cartridge ............................................. 37 Control Panel Select Tone (System Settings) ..... 198
booklet tray.................................................................. 37 Copies .......................................................................... 92
booklet unit .................................................................. 37 copy (sheet) size....................................................... 394
Book Sacnning.......................................................... 142 copy (sheet) size/type......................................398, 399
Book Scanning.......................................................... 142 Copy Control (System Settings)............................. 231
bottom left cover ......................................................... 33 Copy Defaults (System Settings) ........................... 226
bottom right cover....................................................... 35 copy document.......................................................... 394
Brightness dial ............................................................ 46 copying facing pages onto separate sheets........... 80
Build Job .................................................................... 119 copying multiple sheets onto one sheet................ 100
built-in fonts ............................................................... 398 copying on tab paper ............................................... 113
Copy Job Complete Tone (System Settings)....... 198
C Copy Mode Settings................................................. 276
Copy Mode Settings (System Settings) ................ 224
Calculator %................................................................ 65
Copy Output .............................................................. 116
calibration .................................................................. 310
Copy Output (System Settings).............................. 229
Calibration (System Settings)................................. 212
copy paper ................................................................. 394
calling stored programs ........................................... 156
copy reduction/enlargement ratio........................... 395
Center Erase/Binding Erase (System Settings)
Covers .......................................................................... 97
............................................................................. 228, 242
Covers - Back Cover Tray (System Settings) ...... 231
change the paper size ............................................. 173
Covers - Front Cover Tray (System Settings)...... 231
checking completed jobs......................................... 264
Create/Check User Accounts (System Settings). 253
checking current/pending jobs ............................... 263
creating a booklet ....................................................... 94
checking paper tray status...................................... 271
cryptographic software............................................... 24
checking the finished output of the copy .............. 122
Custom Button 1 to 3 (System Settings)............... 201
circuit breaker .................................................35, 36, 40
Custom Colors (System Settings).......................... 238
cleaning the machine............................................... 307
Customize Paper Supply Screen
Color (System Settings) .......................................... 217
(System Settings) ..................................................... 206
Color Balance ............................................................. 78
Custom Paper Name (System Settings)............... 203
Color Balance - Black (System Settings) ............. 228
Custom Text 1 to 3 (System Settings) .................. 217
Color Balance - Cyan (System Settings).............. 228
Color Balance - Magenta (System Settings)........ 227
D
Index
Color Effects................................................................ 77
color graduation........................................................ 394 Data Encryption (System Settings)........................ 222
Color Shift.................................................................... 78 data processing resolution ...................................... 397
Color Shift (System Settings) ................................. 228 Date (System Settings)............................................ 195
Color Space (System Settings).............................. 245 Date Format (System Settings).............................. 216
color support ............................................................. 394 Date Position (Side 1) (System Settings) ............. 230
Combine Original Sets............................................. 123 Date Position (Side 2) (System Settings) ............. 230
Common Settings..................................................... 194 Date Position (System Settings) ............................ 234
continuous copy pages............................................ 397 Date Size (System Settings)................................... 230
continuous copy speed............................................ 396 Daylight Savings (System Settings) ...................... 198
continuous printing speed ....................................... 397 De-curl button.............................................................. 38
Contrast ............................................................... 77, 138 Default Print Paper Size (System Settings) ......... 218
406
Index
Delete All Data (System Settings) ......................... 216 entering text ...............................................................193
Delete Outside/Delete Inside.................................. 124 erasing edges and margin shadows
deleting outside or inside of the selected area in the document.........................................................145
when copying ............................................................ 124 erasing edges and margin shadows
deleting stored programs......................................... 154 of the document ..........................................................85
Density (System Settings)....................................... 217 erasing the background color of
dimensions................................................................. 397 documents/adjusting contrast .................................139
dimensions/weight....................................398, 399, 400 error codes.................................................................334
direct authentication ................................................. 282 Error History Report ................................ 275, 276, 279
Display Consumables Screen (System Settings) Estimated Job Time (System Settings) .................223
..................................................................................... 221 Ethernet connector .....................................................33
document feeder.................................................56, 128 exit cover......................................................................37
document feeder tray ................................................. 35 Extended Features Settings List ............................276
Document Feeder Tray Elevation extension flap ............................................................166
(System Settings) ..................................................... 223
document glass.............................................33, 57, 129 F
document guides ........................................................ 35
Failed Access Log (System Settings)....................258
document jams.......................................................... 381
fast copy time ............................................................395
document output tray ................................................. 35
Faults ..........................................................................279
document scanning speed ...................................... 398
Fault Tone (System Settings) .................................199
document size/type .................................................. 398
Feature Access (System Settings).........................254
document stopper....................................................... 35
Feature in 2nd Column (System Settings)............241
drum cartridges ...................................................35, 286
feeding method/paper capacity ..............................397
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color
feeding stage number/paper capacity ...........398, 399
(System Settings) ..................................................... 227
File Format.................................................................138
Dual Color - Source Color (System Settings) ...... 226
Fine-tune 100% (System Settings) ........................232
Dual Color - Target Area Color (System Settings)
finisher tray ............................................................37, 38
..................................................................................... 226
floor space when connected to the main body....399,
Dual - Target Area Color (System Settings)......... 227
400, 401
Folding........................................................................ 115
E
Fonts List....................................................................277
Edge Erase..........................................................85, 145 Force Watermark - Copy Job (System Settings) .217
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge (system settings)...... 228 Free Size....................................................................143
Index
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges front cover ..............................................................33, 37

(System Settings) ..................................................... 242 fuser ..............................................................................35
Edge Erase - Left Edge (System Settings) .......... 228
Edge Erase- Right Edge (System Settings) ......... 228 G
Edge Erase - Side 2 (System Settings) ................ 228
general settings...........................................................63
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges
General Settings Tab (System Settings)...............241
(System Settings) ..................................................... 242
General Settings Tab - Features Allocation
Edge Erase - Top Edge (System Settings) .......... 228
(System Settings) .....................................................225
emulation ................................................................... 398
Gloss Level (System Settings) ...............................223
Encryption Key for Confidential Data
(System Settings) ..................................................... 223
entering/changing stored program name.............. 154
407
H K
handling error terminations ..................................... 265 Keyboard Input Restriction (System Settings) ..... 221
Hide User ID (***) (System Settings)..................... 257
High Capacity Tray Unit ............................................ 36 L
holding........................................................................ 401
Layout Adjustment..............................................80, 141
hole punching.................................................... 117, 401
left cover.................................................................35, 38
Left Page then Right ................................................ 142
I
lever .............................................................................. 35
Image Compression................................................. 147 license .......................................................................... 24
Image Enhancement.......................................... 76, 139 Lighten/Darken..............................................73, 76, 138
Image Enhancement (System Settings) ............... 212 Lighten/Darken (System Settings) ......................... 227
Image Quality...................................................... 74, 138 loading documents ................................................... 128
Image Quality (System Settings) ................... 209, 211 loading paper............................................................. 162
Image Quality Adjustment (System Settings) ...... 211 loading paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) .................... 166
image quality problems ........................................... 324 local access ............................................................... 283
Image Rotation ........................................................... 89 Local Machine Access (System Settings) ............ 258
Image Rotation (System Settings)......................... 229 locking casters ............................................................ 33
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction Login Setup/Auditron Administration
(System Settings) ..................................................... 229 (System Settings) ..................................................... 252
Image Shift .................................................................. 87 Login Setup/Auditron Mode (System Settings).... 258
Image Shift - Side 1 (System Settings)................. 228 Low Power Mode........................................................ 41
Image Shift - Side 2 (System Settings)................. 229 Low Toner Alert Tone (System Settings).............. 199
Image Transfer Screen (System Settings)........... 246
Independent X-Y% ..................................................... 65 M
Initialize Hard Disk (System Settings)................... 215
Machine Clock/Timers (System Settings)............. 195
inserting blank sheets between transparencies .... 99
machine components................................................. 32
Insert Separators - Separators Tray
Machine Configuration............................................. 270
(System Settings) ..................................................... 231
Machine Information................................................. 269
interface ..................................................................... 398
Machine Ready Tone (System Settings) .............. 198
interposer................................................................... 401
Machine Status .................................................268, 269
Interposer (Cover/Transparency separator tray)... 38
machine trouble ........................................................ 320
Invert Image ................................................................ 90
Maintenance (System Settings) ............................. 215
Index
making 2 sided copies ............................................... 91

J
making 2 sided copies of facing pages................... 82
Job Assembly............................................................ 119 making copies of documents with
Job Counter Report.................................................. 277 different settings in a single operation................... 119
Job History Report ........................................... 275, 276 making copies with the image rotated vertically or
Job History Report (System Settings)................... 214 horizontally................................................................... 89
Job Status.......................................................... 262, 275 making enlarged/reduced copies ............................. 63
job template............................................................... 130 making enlarged copies spread over
Job Type on Job Status screen multiple sheets .......................................................... 101
(System Settings) ..................................................... 203 making multiple copies on a single sheet ............. 115
making multiple copies on one sheet .................... 102
making reversed copies of images .......................... 90
408
Index
manageable features and services........................ 284 Original Type - Auto (Black) (System Settings) ...227
maximum fill line ...............................................163, 312 Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)
Maximum Login Attempts (System Settings) ....... 251 (System Settings) .....................................................227
Maximum Number of Sets (System Settings)...... 237 Original Type - Lightweight Originals
maximum power ...............................................400, 401 (System Settings) .....................................................233
maximum power consumption................................ 397 Out of Paper Warning Tone (System Settings) ...199
Maximum Stored Pages (System Settings) .232, 245 Output Color ................................................................69
memory capacity....................................................... 398 Output Color (System Settings)..............................226
Memory Full Procedure (System Settings)...231, 245 Output Color Recognition (System Settings) ....... 211
messages...........................................................334, 344 Output Format .....................................................93, 147
Millimeters/Inches (System Settings) .................... 221 Output Orientation .................................................... 114
minimum space requirements ................................ 397 Output Orientation (System Settings)....................229
Mixed Size Originals ..........................................84, 144 Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet)
Mixed Size Originals (System Settings)................ 228 (System Settings) .....................................................233
Mixed Size Originals - Side 2 Copy Output Orientation - Reverse Order
(System Settings) ..................................................... 232 (System Settings) .....................................................233
Multiple-Up................................................................. 100 output resolution ...............................................394, 397
Output Size Defaults (System Settings)................244
N outputting by specifying finishing ...........................116
output tray ....................................................... 35, 37, 38
Network Controller Jobs Report ............................. 276
output tray capacity ..................................................397
Network Controller Settings (System Settings) ... 247
overview of auditron administration .......................284
Network Settings (System Settings)...................... 247
overview of authentication.......................................282
Non-Copy Job Complete Tone
Overwrite Hard Disk .................................................271
(System Settings) ..................................................... 199
Overwrite Hard Disk (System Settings).................221
non-standard size document .................................... 83
Non-target Area Color................................................ 72
P
notes and restrictions............................................... 404
Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job .......... 404 page description language ......................................397
number of originals held .......................................... 398 Page Number Position (Side 1) (System Settings)
Numeric keypad.......................................................... 46 .....................................................................................230
Page Number Position (Side 2) (System Settings)
O .....................................................................................230
Page Number Position (System Settings) ............235
Index
Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray) (System Settings)

Page Number Size (System Settings)...................230
..................................................................................... 218
Page Number Style (System Settings)..................230
Operation of Up/Down Buttons (System Settings)
paper guides......................................................166, 167
..................................................................................... 221
paper jams .................................................................344
original changing speed........................................... 398
Paper Size (System Settings).................................204
Original Orientation ............. 85, 86, 117, 125, 137, 145
paper size/supported paper ....................................400
Original Orientation (System Settings)..........229, 242
paper size/supported papers ..........................399, 400
Originals ....................................................................... 92
Paper Size Settings (System Settings) .................219
Original Size ........................................................83, 143
Paper Supply ...............................................................66
Original Size Defaults (System Settings)......237, 243
paper supply (selecting the paper for copying)......66
Originals Orientation ................... 87, 91, 101, 104, 111
Paper Supply (System Settings) ............................226
Original Type .................................................73, 74, 137
Paper Supply - Buttons 2-5 (System Settings) ....225
Original Type (System Settings) ............................ 227
409
Paper Tray Attributes (System Settings) .............. 203 Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3-5 (System Settings) . 225
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading Reduce/Enlarge Presets (System Settings)
(System Settings) ..................................................... 206 .............................................................................238, 244
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu registering stored programs.................................... 152
(System Settings) ..................................................... 206 Repeat Image............................................................ 102
Paper Tray Priority (System Settings)................... 207 replacing staple cartridge for C-Finisher or
Paper Tray Settings (System Settings)................. 203 C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................... 298
Paper Type (System Settings) ............................... 205 replacing toner cartridges........................................ 287
Paper Type Priority (System Settings).................. 207 replacing waste toner container ............................. 289
paper types................................................................ 158 Reports (System Settings) ...................................... 214
Passcode (System Settings) .................................. 253 Reset Account (System Settings) .......................... 255
Passcode Entry from Control Panel Reset Total Impressions (System Settings) ......... 255
(System Settings) ..................................................... 258 Reset User Accounts (System Settings)............... 256
periodical replacement parts .................................. 286 resolution ................................................................... 397
Photo .......................................................................... 137 right cover .................................................................... 38
Photo & Text ............................................................. 137 Right Page then Left ................................................ 142
Photo & Text / Printed Original (System Settings) RSA BSAFE ................................................................ 24
..................................................................................... 233
Photo & Text Recognition (System Settings) ...... 211 S
Photographs.............................................................. 138
Sample Set ................................................................ 122
Photo Reproduction Level (System Settings)...... 211
Sample Set (System Settings) ............................... 229
plain paper (printable paper) .................................. 158
Saturation..................................................................... 76
poor image quality.................................................... 324
Saturation (System Settings)..........................227, 245
Poster ......................................................................... 101
saving the scanned data ......................................... 133
power.................................................................. 400, 401
Scan Defaults (System Settings) ........................... 242
Power Saver mode..................................................... 41
scan graduation ........................................................ 398
power source............................................................. 397
Scan Mode Settings ................................................. 276
power switch ............................................................... 33
Scan Mode Settings (System Settings) ................ 240
Preset % .................................................................... 146
scanner connector...................................................... 33
Preset Repeat Image............................................... 115
scanning a color photograph .................................. 138
Printer Lockout Dureation (System Settings) ...... 197
scanning both sides of a document ....................... 136
printing a report/list................................................... 315
scanning both sides of the document.................... 141
printing control number on background ................ 110
Scanning Color ......................................................... 135
Print Report/List........................................................ 275
Index
scanning different size documents simultaneously

Print Report Button (System Settings).................. 214
...............................................................................84, 144
problem solving......................................................... 317
scanning facing pages onto separate sheets ...... 142
Proportional % ............................................................ 64
Scan Resolution........................................................ 141
punching ............................................................ 399, 400
scan resolution..................................................394, 398
punch scrap container .................................37, 38, 303
Scan Service (System Settings)............................. 245
scan size .................................................................... 398
R
screen......................................................................... 310
Reduce/Enlarge........................................................ 146 Screen/Button Settings (System Settings) ........... 200
Reduce/Enlarge (System Settings) ....................... 226 Screen After Auto Clear (System Settings).......... 200
Reduce/Enlarge -2nd to 3rd Buttons Screen Default (System Settings).......................... 200
(System Settings) ..................................................... 241 selecting the color to copy......................................... 69
410
Index
selecting the color to scan....................................... 135 staple cartridges for booklet......................................38

selecting the document type .......................73, 74, 137 staple cartridge storage space .................................38
selecting the paper for copying ................................ 66 stapler faults ..............................................................384
select the image quality ............................................. 77 staples type................................................................286
Serial Number ........................................................... 269 stapling ...............................................................117, 401
Service Rep. Restricted Operation Stored Programming Tone (System Settings) .....199
(System Settings) ..................................................... 223 Supplies......................................................................278
Settings List - Common Items ................................ 276 supplies (consumables) ...........................................286
Shadow Suppression ............................................... 140 supported OS ............................................................398
Shadow Suppression (System Settings) .............. 242 supported protocol....................................................397
Shadow Suppression Level (System Settings).... 245 suppressing the document background ................140
Shapness (System Settings) .................................. 242 System Administrator’s Meter(System Settings)
Sharpness.................................................................... 76 .....................................................................................257
Sharpness (System Settings) ................................. 227 System Administrator’s Passcode
shifting the image copy position ............................... 87 (System Settings) .....................................................250
Sideways Images ..................................................... 137 System Administrator Login ID (System Settings)
Single Color - Color (System Settings) ................. 226 .....................................................................................249
Sleep Mode ................................................................. 41 system administrator mode ...............................50, 184
Software Download (System Settings) ................. 223 System Administrator Settings (System Settings)
Software Options (System Settings) ..................... 216 .....................................................................................249
Software Version ...................................................... 270 System Settings List.................................................277
Source Color ............................................................... 71 system settings menu list ........................................187
special media ............................................................ 160
Specifying an image compression ratio ................ 147 T
specifying a scanning ratio...................................... 146
Tab Margined Shift ...................................................113
specifying a scanning resolution ............................ 141
Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value
specifying face up or down ..................................... 114
(System Settings) .....................................................231
specifying the orientation of loaded documents
Target Area Color .......................................................71
............................85, 87, 91, 92, 101, 104, 111, 117, 125
Text .............................................................................137
specifying the orientation of the loaded documents
Text/Background Contrast (System Settings)......217
....................................................................................... 86
Text Default (System Settings)...............................216
specifying the original size ...................................... 143
Text Effect Default (System Settings) ...................216
specifying the scan size for the document ............. 83
Text Size (System Settings)....................................217
Stamp Color (System Settings).............................. 229
Index
TIFF Format (System Settings) ..............................246

Stamp Density (System Settings) .......................... 233
Time (System Settings) ...........................................195
Stamp Position (Side 1) (System Settings) .......... 229
Time Zone (System Settings) .................................197
Stamp Position (Side 2) (System Settings) .......... 229
toner cartridges ...................................................35, 286
Stamp Position (System Settings) ......................... 233
toner cover ...................................................................33
Stamp Size (System Settings)................................ 229
top cover.......................................................................35
Stamp Text (System Settings)................................ 229
Top Page then Bottom .............................................142
standard paper.......................................................... 160
touch screen ................................................................45
Standard Size............................................................ 143
transfer unit..................................................................35
staple ..................................................................399, 400
Transparency Separators..........................................99
staple cartridge .....................................................37, 38
Tray 1............................................................................33
staple cartridge (C-Finisher) ................................... 385
Tray 2............................................................................33
staple cartridge (D2-Finisher) ................................. 388
411
Tray 3 ........................................................................... 33
Tray 4 ........................................................................... 33
Tray 5 (bypass)..................................................... 33, 36
Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults
(System Settings) ..................................................... 208
Tray 5 (bypass) top cover ................................... 33, 36
Tray 6 ........................................................................... 33
Tray 6 top cover.......................................................... 33
tray capacity ...................................................... 399, 400
tray type ............................................................. 399, 400
Tri-Fold output tray..................................................... 38
Tri-Fold output tray button......................................... 38
trouble during copying ............................................. 329
troubleshooting ......................................................... 318
type .............................................................394, 397, 398
types of authentication............................................. 282
unable to copy........................................................... 329

unauthenticated users ............................................. 282
Upright Images ......................................................... 137
User Account Billing Meter ..................................... 273
User Details Setup (System Settings)................... 257
UserID (System Settings) ....................................... 253
UserID Characters (System Settings)................... 257
User Name (System Settings)................................ 253
Variable % ................................................................. 146
warm-up time ............................................................ 394

Index
waste toner container ........................................ 35, 286

waste toner container cover ..................................... 35
Watermark ................................................................. 110
Watermark (System Settings) ................................ 216
weight ......................................................................... 397
Z Fold ......................................................................... 117
412
DocuColor 6075II/5065II User Guide
DE3786E2-1 (Edition 1)
May 2007
©
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Ug-Dc5065ii 6075ii

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ug-Dc5065ii 6075ii

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Microsoft and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1

1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9

2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 31

3 Setting up the Network Controller ......................................................................... 49

(Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally) ...................... 89

5 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 127

7 Paper and Other Media ..........................................................................................157

8 System Settings..................................................................................................... 183

9 Job Status ...............................................................................................................261

10 Machine Status .......................................................................................................267

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration ......................................................281

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or

13 Problem Solving .................................................................................................... 317

Thank you for selecting the Fuji Xerox DocuColor 6075II/5065II.

This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan operating procedures,

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .

The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS

Using This Guide

This section describes the organization of this guide.

Before Using the Machine

USER DOCUMENTATIONS for Network Controller

Guides for Optional Accessories

Organization of this Guide

1 Before Using the Machine

3 Setting up the Network Controller

Describes the stored programming features that enables to record a series of

7 Paper and Other Media

10 Machine Status

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration

13 Problem Solving

Before Using the Machine

Important Indicates important information that you should read.

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine.

Caution Flammable Explodable Electric Heated Moving Pinched

A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid

A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions

Instructions Unplug Ground/

WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.

Before Using the Machine

Once a month, switch off this product and check if

z the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;

z the power cord is not cracked or worn down.

Never locate this product in the following places:

Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation

When C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed

Before Using the Machine

When folding unit D2 (optional) is installed to D2-Finisher with Booklet

When D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed

When A3+ High Capacity Tray (optional) is installed

Before Using the Machine

z The product emits unusual noise or odor.

Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product,

Be careful in removing jammed staples.

Before Using the Machine

Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)

Regulatory Information for RFID

Product Safety Certification (CB)

Before Using the Machine

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS

LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)

Before Using the Machine

USER DOCUMENTATIONS for Network Controller

1 Before Using the Machine

3 Setting up the Network Controller

7 Paper and Other Media

10 Machine Status

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration

13 Problem Solving

A3+ high capacity tray

C-Finisher, C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

From Last Selection to Low Power Mode

From Last Selection to Sleep Mode